summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old/67166-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67166-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--old/67166-0.txt8615
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8615 deletions
diff --git a/old/67166-0.txt b/old/67166-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a7a3928..0000000
--- a/old/67166-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8615 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg eBook of Self-Help Mechanical Drawing, by
-Nehemiah Hawkins
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
-most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
-of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
-will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before
-using this eBook.
-
-Title: Self-Help Mechanical Drawing
- An Educational Treatise
-
-Author: Nehemiah Hawkins
-
-Release Date: January 15, 2022 [eBook #67166]
-
-Language: English
-
-Produced by: deaurider, Harry Lamé and the Online Distributed
- Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was
- produced from images generously made available by The
- Internet Archive)
-
-*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SELF-HELP MECHANICAL
-DRAWING ***
-
-
-
- Transcriber’s Notes
-
- Text printed in italics in the source document has been transcribed
- _between underscores_, bold face text =between equal signs=. Small
- capitals have been replaced with ALL CAPITALS.
-
- More Transcriber’s Notes may be found at the end of this text.
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
- SELF-HELP
-
- MECHANICAL DRAWING
-
- AN EDUCATIONAL TREATISE
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
- “_LEARN TO DO A THING BY DOING IT._”--_OLD PROVERB_
-
- SELF-HELP
- MECHANICAL DRAWING
-
- _AN EDUCATIONAL TREATISE_
-
- [Illustration]
-
- BY
- N. HAWKINS, M. E.
-
- _Author of Handbook of Calculations, etc._
-
- _New York_: THEO. AUDEL & CO., Publishers
- 1902
-
-
- _Copyrighted
- by
- Theo. Audel & Co.
- New York
- 1902_
-
-
- _This work
- is
- most kindly and
- respectfully dedicated to
- THE COMING MAN
- who at the present time
- is undoubtedly devoting
- a goodly share of
- his spare time to
- the study of
- drawing._
-
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-[Illustration: INTRODUCTION]
-
-
-
-
-Preface.
-
-
-_It is because of a personal and practical experience of the advantage
-to be gained by the possession of a knowledge of drawing, that the
-author is prompted to undertake the rather pleasant task of producing a
-self-help book relating to the subject._
-
-_Since the days of youthful endeavor, the author has passed through an
-extended experience of mechanical life, and scarcely ever without chalk,
-pencil or instrument in hand, to illustrate by sketch or drawing, the
-tools to be employed, or to picture the finished product; accordingly,
-throughout this work, words of explanation and the drawings will go
-together to aid the diligent student._
-
-_It has been said by an eminent writer, that “one workman is superior to
-another--other circumstances being the same--directly in proportion to
-his knowledge in drawing, and those who are ignorant of it must in many
-respects be subservient to others who have obtained that knowledge.”_
-
-_It has been also said that no man is fitted to be foreman of a shop who
-cannot draw, and it is generally true that no one will be appointed to
-that position, except temporarily, who does not possess some knowledge
-of the art, either “freehand” or instrumental._
-
-_It is a question how far a good working knowledge of drawing can be
-attained without a teacher; it is true that but few have become
-proficient without such aid, but it is equally true that “self-help” has
-been the key note to all advancement._
-
-_The author received personal instruction in several ways and times, at
-home, in school, in an architect’s office, and under an experienced
-mechanical engineer, but it was in the early morning hours of a bright
-summer time--lang syne--that he made his first serious attempt to master
-the art of mechanical drawing. It was a struggle and a battle to hold
-himself down to “the board” to the finish, but it was a victory--one,
-won over slothfulness and impatience, and of such a nature as to warrant
-the use of the term “self-help” to the encouragement of others._
-
-_In conclusion two sentiments may be added; if a good working knowledge
-of drawing is “worth the while” then, 1, the student should be
-thoroughly in earnest in acquiring it; 2, he should be willing to take
-sufficient time and give much hard study to gain the skill necessary for
-success._
-
-_This persistence is not irksome. It carries its own reward, and the
-results are definite and sure._
-
- “_One step and then another, and the longest walk is ended;
- One stitch and then another, and the largest rent is mended.
- One brick upon another, and the highest wall is made;
- One flake upon another, and the deepest snow is laid._”
-
-
-
-
-Introduction.
-
-
-Drawing is one of the arts; art relates to something to be done, and art
-in the industrial and mechanical sense aims chiefly at utility, and is
-governed by exact rules; hence mechanical drawing--so-called--tends
-first to be useful and helpful, and second to accuracy in execution,
-including most minute details; it aspires to the perfection of nature in
-adaptability of the means to the end.
-
-Drawing constitutes a universal language, to acquire which is a matter
-of importance, for by its use one is able to illustrate the form and
-dimensions of an object, device, or utility, in very much less time, and
-far more clearly, than by a verbal description.
-
-To a person who may not be able perfectly to understand the language of
-a country, to be able to draw is an aid and a safeguard; to use the
-words of Sir Joshua Reynolds, “the pencil speaks the language of every
-land.”
-
-In extensive iron works and metal-working establishments the designer
-and draughtsman is always in demand. His services are indispensable and
-his position is a highly responsible one. It becomes his special
-province to design improvements, to furnish sketches and to make
-finished drawings; to calculate strains, strength, power, motion,
-weight, friction and durability. All this and much more is the
-professional draughtsman’s work.
-
-In “directory” classification, he who accomplishes such comprehensive
-results as above described is termed a “Draughtsman,” but the word has
-as wide a meaning as “Engineer,” which takes in civil, mechanical,
-naval, sanitary, steam and other engineering specialists. So, in
-drafting, it includes the office boy employed in making blue prints, it
-embraces the copyists, tracers and assistants, as well as the head
-draughtsman and chief engineer.
-
-Consequently the range is wide, and the line hard to draw between
-draughtsmen who work with their hands, and those who work with their
-brains. It may be added that the best men are too frequently
-undervalued, owing to the unavoidable difficulty in distinguishing the
-difference in true worth, between the two widely separated classes.
-
-It may be remarked that they only draw well who draw intelligently;
-aptness in this, as in many other virtues, is a matter of slow growth,
-“here a line and there a line”--it’s the proper direction, not the rate
-of progress, that counts in the end.
-
-There are several methods of drawing--1, Free-hand; 2, Instrumental; 3,
-Geometrical; 4. Perspective. In the first the work, also termed
-sketching, is executed by pencil, pen, crayon, or even paint-brush; in
-the second the result is attained by the use of rule, tee-square,
-drawing pen, etc.; this method is also denominated mechanical drawing,
-and suggests the title of this volume.
-
-The great usefulness, not to say necessity, of readiness in executing
-accurately, drawings “to scale,” is emphasized by the fact that now,
-more than ever, is all machinery designed, and it may almost be said, is
-“built,” in the draughting room--this is a valuable hint relating to
-“reading” drawings.
-
-It is wise, as well as easy, to begin at the beginning of things; thus,
-it is altogether the good part to mount a ladder by the first and second
-rounds rather than to attempt it by taking the third, sixth, ninth,
-etc.--especially are first and second rounds the very best to start
-upon; “Chalk-work,” is the first subject introduced, next, that of
-“Free-hand.” These are the first steps leading upward in this most
-agreeable attainment--skill in illustrating and designing of objects,
-tools, and utilities.
-
-A single word of advice before introducing the elementary work connected
-with mechanical drawing: if the student should experience difficulty in
-mastering the diagrams and curves abounding in this book, let him
-consult an experienced draughtsman or teacher, who, by a few strokes of
-a lead pencil, can easily make them plain; that knowledge--which cannot
-be printed or self-taught--termed _the Craftsman’s Art_, is communicated
-largely by personal telling and showing, from man to man; in drawing,
-this help should be thankfully availed of, when necessity arises.
-
- NOTE.--Sketching is often in demand because there is no time for
- finished or careful drawings, and the one who can draw a few lines in
- a moment to let a sudden necessity be known, is the man of the hour.
- All candidates for First Class Engineer’s Certificates in marine
- service in the navy have to undergo an examination in rough drawing;
- this is intended not so much as a proof of the applicant possessing
- the capability of a draughtsman, but in the event of any injury to the
- engines in his charge, so that he may be able to send to his
- Superintendent a rough drawing of the particular part, properly
- dimensioned, so that it could be worked from, and time saved on the
- arrival of the ship at the port where the repairs are to be done.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-[Illustration: PLAN OF THE WORK]
-
- “_No matter how thorough our education may have been at the first,
- rules and formulas will slip from the memory, and every day’s
- experience gives additional evidence of the truth of the old adage
- that_ ‘THE KEY THAT RESTS, RUSTS.’”--SIMPSON BALLARD.
-
-
-
-
-The Plan of the Work.
-
-
-The purpose or scope of this work may be briefly stated: It is to aid
-the aspiring student in making the first advance towards a thorough and
-useful knowledge of drawing in its several divisions, as elsewhere
-defined.
-
-The method to be followed in presenting the subject will be the natural
-order clearly and simply defined, as “from the less to the greater.”
-
-The first subject to be discussed comes under the heading of chalk-work,
-_i. e._, such drawings as can be executed on a blackboard, a floor, or
-even on more primitive surfaces, such as a smooth stone or board.
-
-This is indeed a lowly beginning, but the author is quite confident it
-will awaken as much interest as any part of the book--even in the most
-experienced in the art of drawing, as to them it will revive the
-ambitions and first crude attempts made in the golden days of their
-youth.
-
-Let it be clearly understood by all, and especially by those who wish to
-learn drawing, that the study of this delightful art does not require
-any special qualification. We need only ask one question: Have you
-learned to write? If so, be assured you may learn to draw, but to all
-the same rule applies, first the elements of the art, and afterwards the
-more advanced study.
-
-It is not expected that all should exhibit a decided taste for drawing,
-for the possession of this is rather a gift of nature than the result of
-education; but a knowledge of principles and a certain amount of
-executive ability may be obtained by every one of average capacity, and
-whatever the natural power may be, it will be increased and developed by
-exercise; if the progress is steady and continuous and in the right
-direction, success is sure to crown the work.
-
-The second division of the book will be free-hand drawing, _i. e._, that
-which is executed without instruments. Nothing to instruct has been
-spared in this important step in the path of advancement.
-
-The illustrations accompanying the two opening sections have been made
-designedly elementary, for there are many who have a taste for drawing
-and who have a desire to learn, who from place of residence or other
-circumstances have not the opportunity of receiving the assistance of a
-master. To such this book presents itself as a friend directing to the
-right road, talking, reasoning, and explaining by the way.
-
-The “chalk-work” and “free-hand” sections of the book relate to the
-foundations upon which all must rest who seek the aid to be derived from
-the art; hence, the following pages are written with a view to encourage
-all, and those who are prepared to follow the directions given in them
-may look forward to the possession of sufficient drawing power to add to
-their usefulness in after life.
-
-At this point of attainment there arises a need to know the meaning of
-many words and phrases used by draughtsmen; these are grouped
-alphabetically from A to Z under the heading of,----
-
-Useful Terms and Definitions: Memorizing these few pages will be of
-benefit, as an intimate knowledge of the language of the drawing office
-stamps a man as worthy of a hearing, and assures attention to anything
-which he may write or say pertaining to the art.
-
-After the Definitions the subject explained will be the Instruments and
-Materials used in mechanical drawings; following in due course appear
-Geometrical and Mechanical Drawing, Gearing, Linear Perspective,
-Projection, Shading, Tracing, Lettering, Drawing Office Rules, Reading
-Drawings, Useful Tables and a General Index, to which the student is
-referred. A careful reading is requested to the following helpful note.
-
-Grateful acknowledgment is made to George Perrott, Esq., M. E., for
-practical and technical assistance throughout the work, and to Theo.
-Lucas, Engineer, for text and illustrations in the portions of the book
-relating to Linear Perspective and Projection.
-
- NOTE.--In MACHINERY Prof. Chas. H. Benjamin says, referring to
- drawing, under heading “How and what to study,” “... I have so far
- said nothing about drawing, for I do not think it of much use to learn
- that, until you know what you want of it. All this time that you have
- been studying mechanism you should have had a sketch book or pad of
- note paper, and made free hand sketches of mechanical movements which
- interested you and of various machine details. You should accustom
- yourself to use drawing as a means of expressing ideas, just as you
- use written words, so that it becomes a second nature to you to sketch
- anything you wish to remember or describe. If you work from
- blue-prints in the shop, or if you can borrow some to study, this will
- help you to understand how a drawing is made. You can get some drawing
- instruments at any time and begin to practice on drawing straight
- lines and circles, so as to become familiar with the instruments. And
- here it will be of great benefit to you if you can attend an evening
- drawing school for one night in the week at least.
-
- “When you have become sufficiently familiar with the principles of
- drawing, a book on mechanism will tell you how to draw gear teeth and
- cams, and how to design various link motions. Make up your own
- problems from what you see in the shop and make your drawing a means
- to an end and not the principal thing; it is of little use to be able
- to make a nice drawing unless you know what to draw and why.
-
- “Drawing is a convenient tool as an aid in expressing to others the
- ideas which you wish to convey; in all cases take the problems and the
- ideas from your every-day work and that which is around you; your
- success will depend upon the close connection which you keep at all
- times between your acquired knowledge and your practical work.”
-
-
-
-
-General List of Contents.
-
-
- INTRODUCTION, 1-24
-
- CHALK WORK, 25-38
-
- PRELIMINARY TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, 39-52
-
- FREEHAND DRAWING, 53-78
-
- GEOMETRICAL DRAWING, 79-100
-
- DRAWING MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTS, 101-134
-
- MECHANICAL DRAWING, 135-188
-
- PENCILING, 139-147
-
- PROJECTION, 148-164
-
- INKING IN DRAWINGS, 167-170
-
- LETTERING DRAWINGS, 171-175
-
- DIMENSIONING DRAWINGS, 176-179
-
- SHADING DRAWINGS, 180-181
-
- SECTION LINING AND COLORS, 182-185
-
- REPRODUCING DRAWINGS, 186-188
-
- DRAWING OFFICE RULES, 189-195
-
- GEARING, 197-208
-
- DESIGNING GEARS, 209-216
-
- WORKING DRAWINGS, 219-227
-
- READING WORKING DRAWINGS, 228-230
-
- PATENT OFFICE RULES FOR DRAWINGS, 231-236
-
- USEFUL HINTS AND “POINTS,” 237-244
-
- LINEAR PERSPECTIVE, 245-265
-
- PERSONAL, BY THE EDITOR, 281
-
- USEFUL TABLES, 269-280
-
- REFERENCE INDEX, 283
-
-
-[Illustration: CHALK-WORK]
-
-
- The peculiarity of all art is that it cannot
- be communicated in writing alone, craft is a
- term which is synonymous with art; a craft
- requires manual dexterity which cannot be
- taught in books.
-
-
-
-
-Chalk Work.
-
-
-The blackboard has been well called the great weapon of the modern
-educator; this is especially true in reference to instruction in an art
-dealing with lines, curves and figures.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 6.]
-
-Many a man can chalk out on a blackboard, or on a piece of sheet-iron,
-or on the floor, just what he wants to show, and make his meaning very
-plain; hence, in every workshop, and many other places, a blackboard is
-more than useful, and it has been said that no draughting office is
-complete without one.
-
-Fig. 6 represents a chalk-crayon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 7.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 8.]
-
-Figs. 7 and 8 need no explanation, as they represent two forms of the
-well-known blackboard.
-
-Chalk lines have this advantage--they are easily altered or rubbed out
-when not needed any longer. The work executed upon a blackboard is
-mostly done by hand, without aid from instruments; a few tools, however,
-are useful--such as, 1, large wooden blackboard compasses holding a
-crayon, which are made and sold by the trade in size twelve inches to
-thirty inches in length; 2, a straight-edge; and 3, some crayons. With
-the compasses circles and part of the circle can be made, and with the
-straight-edge the larger lines can be drawn.
-
-These instruments are shown on page 29, and are, 1, compasses, for
-holding chalk for making circles; 2, a tee-square; 3, a straight-edge;
-4, a protractor for measuring angles; 5, a triangle 60° and 30°; 6, a
-brass holder for crayons.
-
-Blackboard Drawing.--The use of a blackboard comes principally and
-properly under the head of free-hand drawing, but its importance is such
-that a separate division of the volume is assigned to it.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Thus, chalk-work may be considered the first lesson in “free-hand,” as
-all the examples can also be most profitably practiced with pencil and
-paper.
-
-Very rapid drawing upon the board should not be encouraged, as it is
-likely not to be accurate enough; again, the board should be entirely
-free from grease. Cloths, sponges or chamois skin rubbers may be used to
-erase or change the chalk marks. Vertical lines should be drawn from
-above downward; short lines should be drawn with the fingers alone,
-those somewhat longer with the hand, using the wrist-joint; the still
-longer lines with the forearm, using the elbow-joint; those longer yet
-with the whole arm, using the shoulder-joint; lines should always be
-drawn with a uniform motion, slow enough for the eye to follow.
-
-Practice in chalk-work should alternate with sketching in a sketchbook
-and with geometrical drawing--to be hereafter described. The student
-should practice a short time on the board, at least once a week; large
-sizes are the most profitable for the representations to be made; when
-drawing in different directions the hand should be turned, not the paper
-or board; the hand should never be allowed to obstruct the sight, hence
-the hand and fingers should be held in a position of freedom--with
-fingers not nearer than 1¹⁄₂ or 2 inches from the board.
-
- NOTE.--The first lesson of any kind the author received in drawing was
- to make a straight line; this was effected by holding the pencil
- nearly erect and guiding it along by the aid of the little finger held
- pressed against the edge of a board; this was a useful item of
- knowledge, as proved by passing years.
-
- A well-known artist, in telling his early experience, said: “The first
- thing I was taught was to draw a line, divide it, erect a
- perpendicular from its center, and afterwards to divide the angle made
- by the perpendicular.” In answer to a question asking how long he was
- kept at the lines, he replied, “about two months--or a month or two,”
- indicating that even the longer time would have been well spent in
- learning to draw a straight line.
-
-
-PREPARATORY PRACTICE IN DRAWING.
-
-Every visible object is bounded by lines which enable the observer to
-determine its shape. If these lines are straight or curved, the shape of
-the object is regular; if broken, the shape of the object is irregular.
-
-The elements, then, of form are lines, straight, curved, or broken, and
-these, therefore, furnish the beginning of all instruction in free-hand
-or mechanical drawing.
-
-
-PERPENDICULAR LINES.
-
-Fig. 15 shows six lines--upright and perpendicular, with points or
-“dots” indicated at the top and bottom of each line; to draw these,
-proceed thus:
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 15.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 16.]
-
-The learner should stand with his right shoulder opposite the board, and
-the weight of the hand and the arm should be allowed to fall naturally;
-now, make on the board two points, one being six inches above the other,
-these being merely “dots,” shown at the ends of the lines, figs. 15,
-etc., and made with two motions; the line between the points should now
-be drawn not too quickly from the upper to the lower point; three
-movements of the hand and arm complete the line; to draw the other five
-lines the movements have simply to be repeated.
-
-If the student pronounces to himself “one,” “two,” “three,” at each
-motion, it will be helpful; in this exercise, fig. 15, the aim is to
-make six lines, each line being parallel to the first. Again, in the
-example, it is intended that the lower point should be made first, next
-the upper, and lastly the line drawn from the upper to the lower point,
-but the order may be reversed; at _one_ the upper point, at _two_ the
-lower, at _three_ the stroke upwards to complete the line.
-
-
-HORIZONTAL LINES.
-
-To make these as shown in fig. 16, proceed as follows: With the word
-_one_ make a point, with _two_ another point six inches at the left,
-with _three_ draw a straight line from the left point to the right. All
-added lines should be parallel: for practice, reverse the process thus,
-_one_, make a “point,” at _two_ another point at the right, at _three_
-draw line to the left.
-
-The student will note that the two motions--at the words _one_ and
-_two_--are to fix the positions of the ends of the lines; this practice
-will be found useful in the most advanced examples and an item of
-elementary practice never to be forgotten--like the help to be derived
-by the first round of a ladder.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 17.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 18.]
-
-
-OBLIQUE LINES.
-
-In drawing oblique straight lines as shown in fig. 17, at the word _one_
-let the student make the lower point; at the word _two_ the upper, a
-little to the right of the lower; at the word _three_ draw a line
-quickly from the upper to the lower point. In pronouncing the words
-_one_, _two_, _three_, let the student make the additional parallel
-lines.
-
-As shown in fig. 18, at the word _one_ make the lower point; at the word
-_two_ the upper point, a little _to the left_; at the word _three_ draw
-a line rapidly from the upper to the lower point, and “timing” the
-process by repeating _one_, _two_, _three_, make the additional parallel
-lines.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 19.]
-
-
-BROKEN LINES.
-
-A broken line is composed of two or more straight lines at angles to
-each other (see fig. 19). To draw them begin (saying) _one_, make a
-point; _two_ a point below at the left; _three_, a point above at the
-left; _four_, draw a line from the left hand point to the lower point;
-at the word _five_, from the lower point to the upper right hand point.
-For practice draw numerous lines in the same way, keeping them parallel
-to each other, as shown in fig. 20.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 20.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 21.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 22.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 24.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 23.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 25.]
-
-In example, fig. 21, the arrangement of the points is changed--let the
-student draw at the words, as follows: _One_, a point; _two_, a point
-above at the left; _three_, a point below at the left; _four_, draw from
-the point at the left to the upper point; _five_, from the upper point
-to the lower right hand point; continue to add parallel lines to
-complete the figure as shown.
-
-Figs. 22 and 23 are given as examples to practice, making first the
-points and then the connecting lines and afterward the parallel lines to
-complete the figures.
-
-
-CURVED LINES.
-
-To draw curved lines, as shown in fig. 24. At the word _one_, point; at
-the word _two_, point three inches directly above; _three_, at the same
-distance above again make a point; now draw a curve as shown, joining
-the middle point and the upper point; now draw the curve as shown below
-it; finally complete figure as shown.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 26.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 27.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 28.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 29.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 30.]
-
-Figs. 25 to 30 are to be practiced, making first the points and then
-connecting them by the curves to complete the figures.
-
-When two or more students are working together, with each having a
-blackboard, the counting may be in concert--or a teacher could count for
-a class. In these line examples care should be used in making them of
-uniform length. There is a difference to be noted between a crooked line
-and a broken line, the latter being a straight line and the former
-deviating from it.
-
-Square chalk crayons are the best for hand work, as lines of an even or
-uniform width can be drawn with them.
-
-A very fine effect is produced by using two thicknesses of chalk, one
-being double the thickness of the other; the heavy lines being used on
-the shade side of objects will produce a good effect, giving thickness
-and body to the object.
-
-Round chalk crayons are used in the compasses to draw circles, but hand
-lines drawn with them are not so neat as those produced with the
-square-shaped chalk.
-
-To obliterate or remove the construction, or false lines made on the
-blackboard, a wooden handle two inches in diameter with a cone end 3 or
-4 inches long, covered with chamois skin or soft cloth tightly wrapped
-round the cone and fastened with a tack or drawing pin, makes the best
-implement to erase lines not required, the point of the cone will remove
-these without destroying the lines or curves which meet them.
-
-Sponges, chamois skin or cloth rubbers are used to rub out the chalk
-drawings and clean the blackboard.
-
-The best height for a diagram on the blackboard is not higher than the
-head, nor lower than the elbow.
-
-Horizontal lines should be made from the left to the right; the body and
-arm being moved with the hand, and kept in the same relative position
-with it, will steady the hand.
-
-Curved lines to the left should be drawn first, enabling the eye to take
-in not only the curve in process of formation but that already made.
-
-Passing the crayon in the hand, over the intended curve previous to
-marking it, will guide the eye and give confidence to the hand in
-chalking the curve.
-
-A proper distance from the blackboard is essential, the face being about
-two feet away from it.
-
-Draw with the whole arm extended from the shoulder-joint, not from the
-elbow or wrist.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 31.]
-
-[Illustration: “There are more ways than one of telling things: by
-speech, by writing, by printing, also by pictures and drawings.”
-Knowles]
-
-
-[Illustration: TERMS DEFINITIONS]
-
-[Illustration: ELECTRA.]
-
-
-
-
-Preliminary Terms and Definitions.
-
-
-Like all the arts, drawing has a nomenclature of its own, and nothing
-can be more helpful to the beginner than to know the name of things
-relating to the art of drawing. This is a language almost peculiar to
-itself, and used daily and hourly by many thousands of superintendents,
-foremen and master mechanics, as well as by owners, designers and
-draughtsmen, hence its introduction at this early stage.
-
- =ALTITUDE.=--This is the elevation of an object above its base, or the
- perpendicular distance between the top and bottom of a figure.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 33.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 34.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 35.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 36.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 37.]
-
- =ANGLE= is the difference in the direction of two lines which meet or
- tend to meet. The lines are called _the sides_ and the point of
- meeting, the _vertex_ of the lines.
-
- To make an angle apparent, the two lines must meet in a point, as _A
- B_ and _A C_, which meet in the point _A_, as shown in fig. 33.
-
- Angles are measured by degrees.
-
- A _Degree_ is one of the three hundred and sixty equal parts of the
- space about a point in a plane.
-
- Angles are distinguished in respect to magnitude by the terms Right,
- Acute and Obtuse Angles.
-
- A _Right Angle_ is that formed by one line meeting another, so as to
- make equal angles with that other.
-
- The lines forming a right angle are _perpendicular to each other_.
-
- An _Acute Angle_ is less than a right angle. See Fig. 35.
-
- An _Obtuse Angle_ is greater than a right angle. See Fig. 36.
-
- Obtuse and acute angles are also called _oblique angles_; and lines
- which are neither parallel nor perpendicular to each other are called
- _oblique lines_.
-
- The _Vertex_ or _Apex_ of an angle is the point in which the including
- lines meet.
-
- An angle is commonly designated by a letter at its vertex; but when
- two or more angles have their vertices at the same point, they cannot
- be thus distinguished.
-
- For example, when the three lines _A B_, _A C_, and _A D_ in fig. 37
- meet in the common point _A_, we designate either of the angles
- formed, by three letters, placing that at the vertex between those at
- the opposite extremities of the including lines. Thus, we say, the
- angle _B A C_, etc.
-
- =APEX.=--The summit or highest point of an object.
-
- =ARC.=--See circle.
-
- =AXIS OF A SOLID.=--An imaginary straight line passing through its
- center.
-
- =AXIS OF A FIGURE.=--A straight line passing through the center of a
- figure, and dividing it into two equal parts.
-
- =BASE.=--The base of a solid figure is that on which it stands--the
- lowest part.
-
- =BISECT.=--To divide into two equal parts.
-
- =BISECTOR.=--A line which bisects.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 38.]
-
- =CIRCLE.=--A _Circle_ is a plane figure bounded by one uniformly
- curved line, all of the points in which are at the same distance from
- a certain point within, called the _Center_.
-
- The _Circumference_ of a circle is the curved line that bounds it.
-
- The _Diameter_ of a circle is a line passing through its center, and
- terminating at both ends in the circumference, as _A C B_.
-
- The _Radius_ of a circle is a line extending from its center to any
- point in the circumference. It is one-half of the diameter. All the
- diameters of a circle are equal, as are also all the radii _C D_, _C
- B_ and _C A_.
-
- An _Arc_ of a circle is any portion of the circumference, as _B D_ and
- _A D_.
-
- _Semi-Circle._--Half a circle formed by bisecting it with a diameter,
- as _A C B_. Fig. 38.
-
- An angle having its vertex at the center of a circle is measured by
- the arc intercepted by its sides. Thus, the arc _A D_ measures the
- angle _A C D_, and in general, to compare different angles, we have
- but to compare the arcs, included by their sides, of the equal circles
- having their centers at the vertices of the angles.
-
- =CIRCUMSCRIBE.=--To draw a line of figures about or outside, such as a
- circle drawn around a square touching its corners or angles.
-
- _Inscribe._--To draw a line or figure inside or on the interior, such
- as a circle drawn within a square touching its sides.
-
- =CONCAVE.=--Curving inwardly.
-
- =CONE.=--A solid body or figure having a circle for its base, and its
- top terminated in a point or vertex.
-
- =CONSTRUCTION.=--The making of any object.
-
- =CONTOUR.=--The outline of the general appearance of an object.
-
- =CONVERGENCE.=--Lines extending towards a common point.
-
- =CONVEX.=--Rising or swelling into a round form--the opposite to
- concave.
-
- =CORNER.=--The point of meeting of the edges of a solid, or the two
- sides of a plane figure.
-
- =CROSS-HATCHES.=--In free-hand drawing the use of lines crossing each
- other to produce light and shade effects.
-
- =CURVE.=--A line of which no part is straight.
-
- _Reversed Curve._--One whose curvature is first in one direction and
- then in the opposite direction.
-
- _Spiral Curve._--A plain curve which winds about and recedes,
- according to some law, from its point of beginning, which is called
- its center.
-
- =CYLINDER.=--A solid bounded by a curved surface and by two opposite
- faces called bases; the bases may be any curved figures and give the
- name to the cylinder; thus a circular cylinder is one whose bases are
- circles.
-
- =CYLINDRICAL.=--Having the general form of a cylinder.
-
- =DEGREE.=--The 360th part of a circle.
-
- =DESCRIBE.=--To make or draw a curved line; to draw a plan.
-
- =DESIGN.=--Any arrangement or combination to produce desired results
- in industry or art. To delineate a form or figure by drawing the
- outline--a sketch.
-
- =DEVELOP.=--To unroll or lay out.
-
- =DIAGONAL.=--A right line drawn from angle to angle of a quadrilateral
- or many angled figure and dividing it into two parts.
-
- =DIAMETER.=--A right line passing through the center of a circle or
- other round figure terminated by the curve and dividing the figure
- symmetrically into two equal parts.
-
- =EDGE.=--The intersection of any two surfaces.
-
- =ELEVATION.=--The term elevation, vertical projection and _front
- view_--applied to drawings--all have the same meaning.
-
- =FACE.=--One of the plane surfaces of a solid; it may be bounded by
- straight or curved edges.
-
- =FINISHING.=--Completing a drawing whose lines have been determined by
- erasing unnecessary lines and strengthening and accentuating where
- this is needed.
-
- =FORESHORTENING.=--Apparent decrease in length, owing to objects being
- viewed obliquely; thus a wheel, when seen obliquely, instead of
- appearing round, presents the appearance of an ellipse.
-
- =FREE-HAND.=--Executed by the hand unaided by instruments.
-
- =GENERATED.=--Produced by.
-
- =GEOMETRIC.=--According to geometry.
-
- =HALF-TINT.=--The shading produced by means of parallel equidistant
- lines.
-
- =HEMISPHERE.=--Half a sphere obtained by bisecting a sphere by a
- plane.
-
- =HORIZONTAL.=--Parallel to the surface of smooth water. In drawing, a
- line drawn parallel to the top and bottom of the sheet is called
- horizontal.
-
- =INSCRIBE.=--See circumscribe--its opposite.
-
- =INSTRUMENTAL.=--By the use of instruments.
-
- =LINE.=--A line has length, only, as A C; a right line is a straight
- line, the shortest line that can be drawn between two points, A----C.
-
- _Straight._ One which has the same direction throughout its entire
- length.
-
- _Curved._ One no part of which is straight.
-
- _Broken._ One composed of different successive straight lines.
-
- _Mixed._ One of straight and curved lines.
-
- _Center._ A line used to indicate the center of an object.
-
- _Construction._ A working line used to obtain required lines.
-
- _Dotted._ A line composed of short dashes. - - - - - -
-
- _Dash._ A line composed of long dashes. -- -- --
-
- _Dot_ and _Dash_. A line composed of dots and dashes alternating. -- ·
- -- · --
-
- _Dimension._ A line upon which a dimension is placed.
-
- _Full._ An unbroken line, usually representing a visible edge. ------
-
- _Shadow._ A line about twice as wide as the ordinary full line.
-
- A straight line is often called simply a line, and a curved line a
- curve.
-
- =LONGITUDINAL.=--In the direction of the length of an object.
-
- =MODEL.=--A form used for study.
-
- =OBLIQUE.=--Neither horizontal nor vertical.
-
- =OBLONG.=--A rectangle with unequal sides.
-
- =OVAL.=--A plane figure resembling the longitudinal section of an egg;
- or elliptical in shape.
-
- =OVERALL.=--The entire length.
-
- =PARALLEL.=--Having the same direction and everywhere equally distant.
-
- =PATTERN.=--That which is used as a guide or copy in making things.
-
- _Flat._ One made of paper or other thin material.
-
- _Solid._ One which reproduces the form and size of the object to be
- made.
-
- =PERIMETER.=--The boundary of a closed plane figure.
-
- =PERPENDICULAR.=--At an angle of 90°.
-
- =PERSPECTIVE.=--View; drawing objects as they appear to the eye from
- any given distance and situation, real or imaginary.
-
- =PLAN.=--Plan, horizontal projection and _top view_ have the same
- meaning.
-
- =PLANE FIGURE.=--A part of a plane surface bounded by straight or
- curved lines, or by both combined.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 39.]
-
- =POLYGON.=--A plane figure bounded by straight lines called the sides
- of the polygon. The least number of sides that can bound a polygon is
- three. Polygons bounded by a greater number of sides than four are
- denominated only by the number of sides.
-
- A polygon of five sides is called a _Pentagon_; of six, a _Hexagon_;
- of seven, a _Heptagon_; of eight, an _Octagon_; of nine, a _Nonagon_,
- etc.
-
- _Diagonals_ of a polygon are lines joining the vertices of angles not
- adjacent.
-
- The _Perimeter_ of a polygon is its boundary considered as a whole.
-
- The _Base_ of a polygon is the side upon which the polygon is supposed
- to stand.
-
- The _Altitude_ of a polygon is the perpendicular distance between the
- base and a side or angle opposite the base.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 40.]
-
- A _Quadrilateral_ is a polygon having four sides and four angles.
-
- A _Parallelogram_ is a quadrilateral which has its opposite sides
- parallel.
-
- The side upon which a parallelogram stands and the opposite side are
- called respectively its lower and upper bases.
-
- A _Rectangle_ is a parallelogram having its angles right angles.
-
- A _Square_ is an equilateral rectangle, fig. 41.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 41.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 42.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 43.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 44.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 45.-49.]
-
- A _Rhomboid_ is an oblique-angled parallelogram.
-
- A _Rhombus_ is an equilateral rhomboid, fig. 42.
-
- A _Trapezium_ is a quadrilateral having no two sides parallel, fig.
- 43.
-
- A _Trapezoid_ is a quadrilateral in which two opposite sides are
- parallel, and the other two oblique, fig. 44.
-
- =A POLYHEDRON= is a solid bounded by planes. There are five regular
- solids which are shown in figs. 45, 46, 47, 48 and 49. A regular solid
- is bounded by similar and regular plane figures.
-
- Fig. 45.--The _tetrahedron_, bounded by four equilateral triangles.
-
- Fig. 46.--The _hexahedron_, or cube, bounded by six squares.
-
- Fig. 47.--The _octahedron_, bounded by eight equilateral triangles.
-
- Fig. 48.--The _dodecahedron_, bounded by twelve pentagons.
-
- Fig. 49.--The _icosahedron_, bounded by twenty equilateral triangles.
-
- =PRISM.=--A solid whose bases or ends are very similar plane figures,
- and whose sides are parallelograms; prisms are called triangular,
- square, etc., according as the bases are triangles, squares, etc.
-
- =PRODUCE.=--To continue or extend.
-
- =PROFILE.=--An outline or contour.
-
- =PROJECTION.=--The view of an object obtained upon a plane by
- projecting lines perpendicular to the plane.
-
- =QUADRANT.=--The fourth part; a quarter; the quarter of a circle.
-
- =QUADRISECT.=--To divide into four equal parts.
-
- =SECTION.=--A projection upon a plane parallel to a cutting plane
- which intersects any object. The section generally represents the part
- behind the cutting plane, and represents the cut surfaces by diagonal
- lines.
-
- =SECTIONAL.=--Showing the section made by a plane.
-
- =SHADOW.=--Shade and shadow have about the same meaning.
-
- =SOLID.=--A solid has three dimensions--length, breadth and thickness.
-
- =SPHERE.=--A solid bounded by a curved surface every point of which is
- equally distant from a point within called the center.
-
- =SURFACE.=--The boundary of a solid. It has but two dimensions--length
- and breadth. Surfaces are plane or curved.
-
- A _Plane Surface_ is one upon which a straight line can be drawn in
- any direction.
-
- A _Curved Surface_ is one no part of which is plane.
-
- The surface of the sphere is curved in every direction, while the
- curved surfaces of the cylinder and cone are straight in one
- direction.
-
- The surface of a solid is no part of the solid, but is simply the
- boundary of the solid. It has two dimensions only, and any number of
- surfaces put together will give no thickness.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 50.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 51.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 52.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 53.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 54.]
-
- =SYMMETRY.=--_Design._ A proper adjustment or adaptation of parts to
- one another and to the whole.
-
- =TRISECT.=--To divide into three equal parts.
-
- =TRIANGLE.=--A triangle is a polygon having three sides and three
- angles. _Tri_ is a Latin prefix signifying three; hence a Triangle is
- literally a figure containing three angles.
-
- A _Scalene Triangle_ is one in which no two sides are equal. See fig.
- 50.
-
- An _Isosceles Triangle_ is one in which two of the sides are equal.
- See fig. 51.
-
- An _Equilateral Triangle_ is one in which the three sides are equal.
- An _Equiangular Triangle_ is one having its three angles equal. An
- _Acute-Angled Triangle_ is one in which each angle is acute.
-
- A _Right-Angled Triangle_ is one which has one of the angles a right
- angle. See fig. 53.
-
- An _Obtuse-Angled Triangle_ is one having an obtuse angle. Fig. 54.
-
- Equiangular triangles are also equal sided, and vice versa.
-
- =VERTICAL.=--Upright or perpendicular. Vertical and perpendicular are
- not synonymous terms.
-
- =VERTEX.=--See Angle, Quadrilateral, Triangle. The vertex of a solid
- is the point in which its axis intersects the lateral surface.
-
- =VIEW.=--See Elevation. Views are called front, top, right or left
- side, back, or bottom, according as they are made on the different
- planes of projection. They are also sometimes named according to the
- part of the object shown, as edge view, end view, or face view.
-
- =WORKING DRAWING.=--One which gives all the information necessary to
- enable the workman to construct the object.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-[Illustration: FREEHAND DRAWING]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 55.]
-
-
-
-
-Free-Hand Drawing.
-
-
-A free-hand drawing is executed with the unaided hand and eye, without
-guiding instruments or other artificial help. It is necessary to be
-known that all drawing required cannot possibly be done by rule and
-compass, but that some portions must be drawn “free-hand,” trusting to
-the eye alone.
-
-Hence, it is important that the student should be able to sketch at
-sight from objects he may see, or to draw roughly, with a piece of chalk
-or a pencil, pieces of mechanism required to be represented.
-
-Practice in free-hand should go along with mechanical drawing as
-progress is made, and thus cultivating both branches equally.
-
-“A simple sketch will often,” as has been rather roughly said, “express
-more than yards of talk.”
-
-Even a slight sketch refreshes the memory, and in the case of the
-preparation of a complete set of drawings, with a view to the making of
-a thoroughly finished mechanical drawing, the proper course to pursue
-is, to make a general sketch, letter the various parts for reference,
-and then prepare a series of detailed sketches, similarly lettered, and
-diffuse with dimensions.
-
-Everyone, whatever his specialty, feels to-day that the ability to
-sketch rapidly and clearly is among the absolute necessities for correct
-and prompt transactions of business, in giving and executing orders and
-doing business with persons outside his profession.
-
-Mistakes and misunderstandings may be averted by means of rough sketches
-taken at the time and shown for confirmation; this also saves assistants
-from getting into trouble, especially if they pin the sketch to the
-order, for reference, in case of the arising of any dispute. These are a
-few of the advantages of knowing how to sketch quickly and correctly.
-
-In “free-hand” any sort of pencil is better than none, but there is a
-considerable advantage in having a good serviceable article--a pencil
-not too soft nor too hard, and one which will retain its point for some
-little time.
-
-Fig. 55 shows the approved position in which the pencil should be held
-while sketching. The pencil should be held firmly between the thumb and
-first finger of the right hand; press the second finger against the
-pencil at the opposite side to the thumb pressure, so that the pencil is
-firmly held by the contact of the thumb and two fingers--the third and
-fourth fingers just coming into easy reach of the paper surface--the
-wrist or ball of the hand resting lightly on the surface of the
-work--the arm resting on the desk or drawing-board for steadiness.
-
-The motion of the pencil is produced from the movement of the fingers
-and thumb, principally in the vertical strokes, and the horizontal
-strokes are produced by fingers and thumb, combined with a wrist or
-elbow motion; the oblique lines and curves are produced with a free
-movement, with nothing cramped or confined about the finger joints.
-
-
-POSITION.
-
-It should be observed that nothing is more prejudicial to good execution
-than the habit of leaning over the paper, which ought to be placed on a
-surface sufficiently inclined to bring every portion equally under the
-eye, thus obviating the necessity of leaning forward. All support to the
-figure should be obtained by resting on the left arm, the right being
-left free for work. By attention to these rules that awkwardness of
-position, so detrimental to a good figure, will be avoided. It is better
-to have the light on the left hand, as in this direction the shadow of
-the pencil does not interfere with the view of the drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 56.]
-
-
-HOW TO CUT A PENCIL.
-
-Hold the pencil firmly in the left hand, as in the drawing, allowing
-about an inch to project beyond the fingers, and turn it gradually as
-the knife removes the wood. The knife should be held so that the blade
-alone projects beyond the fingers, and the part of it nearest the handle
-used for cutting. The pencil should be placed against the inside of the
-thumb of the right hand, as in the drawing (fig. 56), and the wood
-removed by slight shaving. The lead should not be cut at the same time
-as the wood, but rested on the thumb and pared gently afterwards; by
-attention to these directions the pencil will be economized.
-
-
-HOW TO DRAW STRAIGHT LINES.
-
-Before a line is drawn, the point at which it is to commence and the
-point where it is to end, should be known; and let it be distinctly
-understood that _this judgment of the eye_, and placing of points,
-should invariably precede the drawing of every line.
-
-The first effort should, therefore, be to produce a line of points
-exactly parallel with the upper edge of the paper, and at equal
-distances from each other. Commence with point _A_ and place the point
-_B_ carefully level with it, now place a slip of paper against these
-points in the original, mark their distance apart, and see if the same
-proportion has been given in your copy; if not, make the necessary
-correction. Proceed with the next point, examine it, and so on to the
-end of the line. When this is complete, examine each point in
-succession, to try if it is at the same distance from the top of the
-paper; when this is correct, proceed to draw the first level line. Hold
-the pencil as in the drawing, fig. 57, keeping the elbow near the side;
-join _A_ to _B_ by one light, steady stroke, produced by a movement of
-the wrist, and add stroke upon stroke until the line is of the required
-depth. Continue this process to the end of the line of points. Now place
-the point _D_ at the right distance below the _A_, proceed with the
-points for another line as before, and continue the lines until the
-paper is covered. In producing the stroke the pencil should not be
-jerked, or any stop be made between the points, but the movement should
-be even throughout, and it is much better to produce each line by
-several soft strokes, as _the repetition of delicate lines induces
-lightness of touch and freedom of hand_; and it is also no small
-advantage that lines thus produced are more easily removed by the India
-rubber, should they require correction.
-
-
-TO DRAW THE FIRST OBLIQUE LINE.
-
-Prepare three rows of points down the side of the paper, on the left
-hand; examine them to see that they are at equal distances from the side
-and from each other; hold the pencil as in the drawing, fig. 58, move
-the elbow a little from the side, and join the points _A_ and _B_ with
-one light line, produced by a movement of the fingers and thumb,
-repeating the strokes until the line is of the requisite depth; proceed
-to join _B_ to _C_, taking care previously to bring the hand a little
-down the paper, as the line from _A_ to _C_ is too long to be produced
-from one position. When the three rows of points are filled, make
-another set, examine them and proceed as before. By these means the
-paper will be covered with oblique lines, and if the points have been
-placed exactly, the sheet will have a neat and regular appearance.
-
- NOTE.--The drawings of hands are introduced to show the positions for
- holding the pencil, and are not intended for copying.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 57.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 58.]
-
-It is a common, and at the same time highly injurious habit, to draw
-this line by a movement of the wrist, the fingers remaining rigid. This
-may be detected by watching the action of the thumb; if it bends as the
-line is produced, all is right; but if it does not the wrist is at work.
-
-
-TO DRAW THE UPRIGHT OR PERPENDICULAR LINE.
-
-This line demands the greatest attention, and any care bestowed upon it
-will be amply repaid in the after studies.
-
-Commence by placing a line of points down the side of the paper, examine
-them very carefully to see that they are all the same distance from its
-edge, hold the pencil as in the drawing, fig. 59, move the elbow well
-out from the side, and join the points by a movement of the fingers and
-thumb. When one line is complete, place the points for the next, and
-examine them from the edge of the paper, not from the line just drawn.
-Proceed in this manner until the paper is covered.
-
-There is in most cases a tendency to place the points for this line in a
-slightly inclined direction, as in writing, though in some instances the
-tendency is the opposite, a thoroughly correct eye in this respect being
-a rare gift: and it may be useful to suggest that the paper be so placed
-that the line of points to be produced may be exactly in front of the
-eye.
-
-
-TO DRAW THE SECOND OBLIQUE LINE.
-
-Prepare three rows of points down the side of the paper, examine them
-for correctness of position, hold the pencil as in the drawing, fig. 60,
-remove the elbow as far as possible from the side, and join the points
-by a movement of the fingers and thumb, and continue the exercise until
-the paper is covered.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 59.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 60.]
-
-It will be noticed that each change in direction of the line to be
-drawn, has been accompanied with a corresponding change in the position
-of the elbow and wrist. The following simple rule will assist the memory
-when placing the hand for any given line; the pencil should be held so
-that it may form a T with the line to be drawn:
-
-[Illustration]
-
-For the horizontal line, elbow near the side.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-For the first oblique, elbow a little removed.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-For the perpendicular, elbow more removed.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-For the second oblique, elbow most removed.
-
-[Illustration: Finger and thumb lines.
-
-Wrist lines.
-
-Finger and thumb lines.
-
-Wrist lines.]
-
-It may also be interesting to notice, with regard to the movements by
-which lines are produced, that they are divided into two systems; the
-first is that of the wrist, which includes the horizontal, and lines in
-nearly the same direction; the second is that of the fingers and thumb,
-by which all other lines are formed. The following diagram exhibits the
-two systems and their various lines grouped, and it will be observed
-that there is a space marked (a) between the two sets, which may be
-considered neutral ground. Lines in this direction may be produced by
-either movement, as may be most convenient, but it will always be found
-that these lines are the most trying to the hand.
-
-
-ON FIGURES FORMED OF STRAIGHT LINES.
-
-Before commencing this subject, let it be clearly understood that future
-success will, in a great measure, depend upon the amount of care
-bestowed upon it. The aim should be to obtain absolute accuracy, and for
-this end the copies should be tested by the most careful measurements,
-and corrected until they are true with the originals, but it should be
-distinctly understood that these measurements are only to be made after
-the eye and hand have done their best.
-
- NOTE.--To some it may appear that too much time and care has been
- bestowed on mere lines, but let it be understood that a good system of
- line drawing is the basis of all education--the slightest outline by a
- hand thus trained has a bold, free and masterly character; and with
- regard to shading, which is simply an aggregation of good lines, it is
- only by such a practiced hand its most charming effects can be
- produced.
-
-Fig. 66: Place the points _A_, _B_. Examine them to see that they are
-the same distance apart as in the original, and that they are level;
-place the point _C_ exactly under _A_, and make _A C_ equal in distance
-to _A B_; now place the point _D_ opposite _C_ and under _B_; try the
-distances between each point to see that they are the same; divide each
-side by a point half way, and then draw the lines.
-
-Fig. 67: Repeat the last figure and add the lines _A_ and _B_, taking
-great care that the points for them are correctly placed.
-
-Fig. 68: Commence with the square as before; then join the half-way
-points.
-
-Fig. 69: After the square is drawn, place the points _A_ and _B_ at the
-right height above the half-way points, and _C_, _D_ at the proper
-distance from the corners, then draw the figure.
-
-Fig. 70: The greatest care should be taken with the squares for this and
-the following figure, as the slightest error in them will destroy the
-symmetry of the drawing within; when the square is completed, join the
-opposite corners, and place on the crossed lines the points _B_, _C_,
-_D_, _E_; examine these to see that they are each at the same distance
-from the centre _A_, and that this distance is equal to the space from
-_A_ to the sides of the square; when all are proved to be correct,
-complete the figure.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 66.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 67.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 68.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 69.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 70.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 71.]
-
-Fig. 71: Repeat the last drawing with, if possible, greater exactness,
-and outside the octagon place the points _A_, _B_, _C_, _D_, etc.;
-examine each of these points to see that they are all at the same
-distance from the centre, and then complete the figure.
-
-
-ON CURVED LINES.
-
-The right position of the hand for drawing any curved line is that
-required for a straight line which would touch the extremities of the
-curve. The straight lines given in the exercises are valuable, not only
-as a guide to the position of the hand, but as an assistance to the eye
-when forming the curves or examining them after they are produced.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-The direction given for drawing a straight line was to form it by one
-steady movement from point to point, without any jerk or stop by the
-way. This instruction requires to be changed for the curve, _which is
-better produced by several short strokes_, thus:
-
-[Illustration]
-
-or by overlapping lines, any outside bits being cleared away with India
-rubber.
-
-These exercises will test the drawing power and try the patience of the
-pupil, but they are worthy of all the care which can be bestowed, which
-in future efforts will meet with its full reward.
-
-Fig. 76: Draw first the square as directed in the previous lesson, join
-the points _A_, _B_, _C_ and add the short lines at _E_ and _F_, proceed
-with the curve _A B_, drawing it with faint lines at first, and adding
-stroke upon stroke until the required depth is obtained; the curve _A C_
-is more difficult to produce, in consequence of the formation of the
-hand; it should, therefore, be drawn in shorter pieces, joining them
-together afterwards by over strokes.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 76.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 77.]
-
-Fig. 77: Draw the square and straight lines first, then add the curves,
-taking care to give the greatest fullness at the right place.
-
-Fig. 78: Draw the square and straight lines, proceed with the curves,
-taking care to make each of the same proportion.
-
-Figs. 79 and 80: The ovals contained in these figures are simply
-foreshortened circles, and as such forms are of frequent occurrence in
-sketching from objects, in bridges, wheels, ends of timber, etc., they
-should be carefully studied; the greatest difficulty is to turn the
-narrow ends, and prevent their looking like corners. For this purpose it
-is better to draw the short curves first, thus:
-
-[Illustration]
-
-and then join the longer sides to them.
-
-Fig. 81: If this figure can be drawn correctly, a great success has been
-achieved; the circle is a most difficult form to delineate, and without
-system could not be accomplished. Draw the square and straight lines
-within it with great care, examine each point of the octagon to see that
-it is at the same distance from the centre, and then draw the circle.
-
-
-EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE.
-
-Several figures, 83 to 96, representing more or less familiar parts of
-machines, utilities, etc., are introduced for practice in free-hand,
-but--
-
-It must be noted that even in free-hand the wise student will
-occasionally use the straight edge and compasses, so as to make his
-first attempts fairly creditable. Many good draughtsmen have begun by
-simply copying such figures and illustrations as are used throughout
-this volume and other similar sources; perhaps there is nothing better
-for practice or training than the copying and reproducing of samples of
-good mechanical drawings, yet it must always be remembered that
-advancement in free-hand must be made in the line of less to greater
-efforts, and that the why and wherefore will be constantly asked by the
-aspiring student; that good and correct drawings are to be aimed for at
-all times in every line and dimension--never forgetting the law of
-proportion in the smallest outlines of objects to be represented.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 78.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 79.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 80.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 81.]
-
-Fig. 83 is a section, or end view of a bar of angle iron; the student
-will find helpful practice in attempting this figure; he may be allowed
-to use a straight-edge in drawing the lines, but no measurements; the
-work should be tested on completion by a rule, or better by penciling
-from the original on tracing paper, and comparing the free-hand with the
-copy, when the defective proportions, if any, will be clearly exhibited.
-
-Fig. 84 is a section of tee iron, and fig. 85 is a section of channel
-iron. These three figures on page 75 should be practiced alternately,
-although seeming similar in shape.
-
-Fig. 86 is a side and end view of an angle plate shaded. Fig. 87 is a
-wrench shaded.
-
-Examples of bolt ends are shown in the two next numbers; fig. 88
-exhibits the common square-head bolt, and fig. 89 the hexagon or
-six-sided bolt-head; these are also examples of _straight-line shading_.
-Fig. 90 is a lathe-dog, and shows an example of _curved shading_; fig.
-92 is an engine crank, and an example of _straight and curved shading_;
-fig. 91 is a screw clamp.
-
-Fig. 93 is a section of boiler plates riveted together; a caulking tool
-is also shown.
-
-In the example, fig. 94--a hand-wheel--the principal difficulty, even
-for the most advanced student in free-hand, will be in drawing the
-circles; a coin, if convenient, can be used to scribe about, in drawing
-these; the other parts can afterwards be filled in around the circle.
-Fig. 96 is introduced for practice in penciling and shading; the figure
-represents a water-wheel on a stone pier.
-
-The familiar oil can is shown in fig. 95. These all are excellent
-objects for practice.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 83.--Fig. 84.--Fig. 85.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 86.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 87.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 88.--Fig. 89.--Fig. 90.--Fig. 91.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 92.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 93.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 94.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 95.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 96.]
-
-
-[Illustration: GEOMETRICAL DRAWING]
-
-[Illustration]
-
-
-
-
-Geometrical Drawing.
-
-
-Geometry is the science of measurement; it has been known for more than
-three thousand years; many lives have been devoted to its development,
-and it exists to-day as the foundation of all mathematics.
-
-Geometrical drawing is the art of representing, to the eye, the problems
-“worked out” by geometricians, and the importance of a knowledge of
-geometrical drawing is paramount. The student will find that the figures
-delineated and explained in the next few pages constantly occur in
-mechanical drawing. Says Walter Smith, State Director of Art Education
-in Massachusetts, “I have never known a case where a student did not
-progress more satisfactorily in his studies after a course of practical
-geometry.”
-
-The elementary conceptions of geometry are few:
-
- 1.--A point.
- 2.--A line.
- 3.--A surface.
- 4.--A solid, and
- 5.--An angle.
-
-All of which elements are used in mechanical drawings.
-
-From these, as data, a vast number of mathematical problems have been
-deduced; of which a few of the most elementary will be illustrated in
-this work; but these few will repay the attention of the student.
-
-In “freehand” drawing the crayon and pencil are used; in geometrical
-drawings the dividers, as shown in illustration, fig. 97, together with
-a rule, are all that is necessary to accomplish the work.
-
-A problem is something to be done, and geometry has been defined as the
-science of measurement; the relation between geometry and mechanical
-drawing is very close, hence the term “geometrical problem.”
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 97.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 98.]
-
-Before proceeding with the examples, a few elementary statements
-belonging to the science of geometry are presented; these will be useful
-to the student, not only while “doing” the problems, but in many cases
-of every-day--future--experience.
-
-Geometry is one of the oldest and simplest of sciences; it may be
-defined as _the science of measurement_; geometry is _the root_ from
-which all regular mathematical calculations issue. It has claimed the
-best thought of practical men from the times of the Greeks and Romans
-two thousand years ago; they derived their knowledge of the science from
-the Egyptians, who in turn were indebted to the Chaldeans and Hindoos in
-times beyond any authentic history; hence it was under the operations of
-the laws explained in geometry, that the pyramids of Egypt and the
-temples of Greece were constructed, as well as the engines of war and
-appliances of peace of ancient times.
-
-_A point_ is mere position, and has no magnitude.
-
-_A line_ is that which has extension in length only. The extremities of
-lines are points.
-
-_A surface_ is that which has extension in length and breadth only.
-
-_A solid_ is that which has extension in length, breadth and thickness.
-
-_An angle_ is the difference in the direction of two lines proceeding
-from the same point.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Lines, Surfaces, Angles and Solids constitute the different kinds of
-quantity called _geometrical_ magnitudes.
-
-_Parallel lines_ are lines which have the same direction; hence parallel
-lines can never meet, however far they may be produced; for two lines
-taking the same direction cannot approach or recede from each other.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-An _Axiom_ is a self-evident truth, not only too simple to require, _but
-too simple to admit of demonstration_.
-
-A _Proposition_ is something which is either proposed to be done, or to
-be demonstrated, and is either a problem or a theorem.
-
-A _Problem_ is something proposed to be done.
-
-A _Theorem_ is something proposed to be demonstrated.
-
-A _Hypothesis_ is a supposition made with a view to draw from it some
-consequence which establishes the truth or falsehood of a proposition,
-or solves a problem.
-
-A _Lemma_ is something which is premised, or demonstrated, in order to
-render what follows more easy.
-
-A _Corollary_ is a consequent truth derived immediately from some
-preceding truth or demonstration.
-
-A _Scholium_ is a remark or observation made upon something going before
-it.
-
-A _Postulate_ is a problem, the solution of which is self-evident.
-
-Let it be granted--
-
-I. That a straight line can be drawn from any one point to any other
-point;
-
-II. That a straight line can be produced to any distance, or terminated
-at any point;
-
-III. That the circumference of a circle can be described about any
-center, at any distance from that center.
-
-The common algebraic signs are used in Geometry, and it is necessary
-that the student in geometry should understand some of the more simple
-operations of algebra. As the terms circle, angle, triangle, hypothesis,
-axiom, theorem, corollary and definition are constantly occurring in a
-course of geometry, they are abbreviated as shown in the following list:
-
- Addition is expressed by +
- Subtraction is expressed by -
- Multiplication is expressed by ×
- Equality and Equivalency are expressed by =
- Greater than, is expressed by >
- Less than, is expressed by <
- Thus _B_ is greater than _A_, is written _B_ > _A_
- _B_ is less than _A_, is written _B_ < _A_
- A circle is expressed by O
- An angle is expressed by L
- A right angle is expressed by R. L
- Degrees, minutes and seconds are expressed by ° ′ ″
- A triangle is expressed by △
- The term Hypothesis is expressed by (Hy.)
- The term Axiom is expressed by (Ax.)
- The term Theorem is expressed by (Th.)
- The term Corollary is expressed by (Cor.)
- The term Definition is expressed by (Def.)
- The term Perpendicular is expressed by ⊥
- The difference of two quantities, when it is not
- known which is the greater, is expressed by
- the symbol ~
- Thus, the difference between _A_ and _B_ is written _A_ ~ _B_
-
-
-GEOMETRICAL AXIOMS.
-
-1. _Things which are equal to the same thing are equal to each other._
-
-2. _When equals are added to equals the wholes are equal._
-
-3. _When equals are taken from equals the remainders are equal._
-
-4. _When equals are added to unequals the wholes are unequal._
-
-5. _When equals are taken from unequals the remainders are unequal._
-
-6. _Things which are double of the same thing, or equal things, are
-equal to each other._
-
-7. _Things which are halves of the same thing, or of equal things, are
-equal to each other._
-
-8. _The whole is greater than any of its parts._
-
-9. _Every whole is equal to all its parts taken together._
-
-10. _Things which coincide, or fill the same space, are identical, or
-mutually equal in all their parts._
-
-11. _All right angles are equal to one another._
-
-12. _A straight line is the shortest distance between two points._
-
-13. _Two straight lines cannot enclose a space._
-
-
-Problems in Geometrical Drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 99.]
-
-EXAMPLE 1.--_To bisect_ (cut in two) _a straight line or an arc of a
-circle_, Fig. 99. From the ends of _A B_ as centers, describe arcs
-cutting each other at _C_ and _D_, and draw _C D_, which cuts the line
-at _E_ or the arc at _F_.
-
-EX. 2.--_To draw a perpendicular to a straight line, or a radial line to
-a circular arc_, Fig. 99. Operate as in the foregoing problem. The line
-_C D_ is perpendicular to _A B_; the line _C D_ is also radial to the
-arc _A B_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 100.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 101.]
-
-EX. 3.--_To draw a perpendicular to a straight line, from a given point
-in that line_, Fig. 100. With any radius from any given point _A_ in the
-line _B C_, cut the line at _B_ and _C_. Next, with a longer radius,
-describe arcs from _B_ and _C_, cutting each other at _D_, and draw the
-perpendicular _D A_.
-
-_Second Method_, Fig. 101. From any center _F_ above _B C_, describe a
-circle passing through the given point _A_, and cutting the given line
-at _D_; draw _D F_, and produce it to cut the circle at _E_; and draw
-the perpendicular _A E_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 102.]
-
-_Third Method_, Fig. 102. From _A_ describe an arc _E C_, and from _E_,
-with the same radius, the arc _A C_ cutting the other at _C_; through
-_C_ draw a line _E C D_ and set off _C D_ equal to _C E_, and through
-_D_ draw the perpendicular _A D_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 103.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 104.]
-
-EX. 4.--_To draw a perpendicular to a straight line from any point
-without it_, Fig. 103. From the point _A_ with a sufficient radius cut
-the given line at _F_ and _G_; and from these points describe arcs
-cutting at _E_. Draw the perpendicular _A E_.
-
-If there be no room below the line, the intersection may be taken above
-the line; that is to say, between the line and the given point.
-
-_Second Method_, Fig. 104. From any two points _B C_ at some distance
-apart, in the given line, and with the radii _B A_, _C A_, respectively,
-describe arcs cutting at _A D_. Draw the perpendicular _A D_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 105.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 106.]
-
-EX. 5.--_To draw a parallel line through a given point_, Fig. 105. With
-a radius equal to the given point _C_ from the given line _A B_,
-describe the arc _D_ from _B_, taken considerably distant from _C_. Draw
-the parallel through _C_ to touch the arc _D_.
-
-_Second Method_, Fig. 106. From _A_, the given point, describe the arc
-_F D_, cutting the given line at _F_; from _F_, with the same radius,
-describe the arc _E A_, and set off _F D_, equal to _E A_. Draw the
-parallel through the points _A D_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 107.]
-
-When a series of parallels are required perpendicular to a base line _A
-B_, they may be drawn as in fig. 107 through points in the base line set
-off at the required distances apart. This method is convenient also
-where a succession of parallels are required to a given line _C D_, for
-the perpendicular may be drawn to it, and any number of parallels may be
-drawn on the perpendicular.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 108.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 109.]
-
-EX. 6.--_To divide a line into a number of equal parts_, Fig. 108.
-
-To divide the line _A B_ into, say, five parts. From _A_ and _B_ draw
-parallels _A C_, _B D_ on opposite sides; set off any convenient
-distance four times (one less than the given number), from _A_ on _A C_,
-and on _B_ on _B D_; join the first on _A C_ to the fourth on _B D_, and
-so on. The lines so drawn divide _A B_ as required.
-
-_Second Method_, Fig. 109. Draw the line at _A C_, at an angle from _A_,
-set off, say, five equal parts; draw _B_ 5, and draw parallels to it
-from the other points of division in _A C_. These parallels divide _A B_
-as required.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 110.]
-
-EX. 7.--_Upon a straight line to draw an angle equal to a given angle_,
-Fig. 110. Let _A_ be the given angle and _F G_ the line. With any radius
-from the points _A_ and _F_, describe arcs _D E_, _I H_, cutting the
-sides of the angle _A_ and the line _F G_.
-
-Set off the arc _I H_, equal to _D E_ and draw _F H_. The angle _F_ is
-equal to _A_ as required.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 111.]
-
-EX. 8.--_To bisect an angle_, Fig. 111. Let _A C B_ be the angle; on the
-center _C_ cut the sides at _A B_. On _A_ and _B_ as centers describe
-arcs cutting at _D_ dividing the angle into two equal parts.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 112.]
-
-EX. 9.--_To find the center of a circle or of an arc of a circle._ Fig.
-112. Draw the chord _A B_, bisect it by the perpendicular _C D_, bounded
-both ways by the circle; and bisect _C D_ for the center _G_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 113.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 114.]
-
-EX. 10.--_Through two given points to describe an arc of a circle with a
-given radius_, Fig. 113. On the points _A_ and _B_ as centers, with the
-given radius, describe arcs cutting at _C_; and from _C_, with the same
-radius, describe an arc _A B_ as required.
-
-Second, for a circle or an arc, Fig. 114. Select three points _A_, _B_,
-_C_ in the circumference, well apart; with the same radius describe arcs
-from these three points cutting each other, and draw two lines _D E_, _F
-G_, through their intersections according to Fig. 107. The point where
-they cut is the center of the circle or arc.
-
-EX. 11.--_To describe a circle passing through three given points_, Fig.
-114. Let _A_, _B_, _C_ be the given points and proceed as in last
-problem to find the center _O_, from which the circle may be described.
-
-This problem is variously useful; in finding the diameter of a large
-fly-wheel, or any other object of large diameter when only a part of the
-circumference is accessible; in striking out arches when the span and
-rise are given, etc.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 115.]
-
-EX. 12.--_To draw a tangent to a circle from a given point in the
-circumference_, Fig. 115. From _A_ set off equal segments _A B_, _A D_,
-join _B D_ and draw _A E_, parallel to it, for the tangent.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 116.]
-
-EX. 13.--_To draw tangents to a circle from points without it_, Fig.
-116. From _A_ with the radius _A C_ describe an arc _B C D_, and from
-_C_ with a radius equal to the diameter of the circle, cut the arc at _B
-D_, join _B C_, _C D_, cutting the circle at _E F_, and draw _A E_, _A
-F_, the tangents.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 117.]
-
-EX. 14.--_Between two inclined lines to draw a series of circles
-touching these lines and touching each other_, Fig. 117. Bisect the
-inclination of the given lines _A B_, _C D_ by the line _N O_. From a
-point _P_ in this line draw the perpendicular _P B_ to the line _A B_,
-and on _P_ describe the circle _B D_, touching the lines and cutting the
-center lines at _E_. From _E_ draw _E F_ perpendicular to the center
-line, cutting _A B_ at _F_, and from _F_ describe an arc _E G_, cutting
-_A B_ at _G_. Draw _G H_ parallel to _B P_, giving _H_, the center of
-the next circle, to be described with the radius _H E_, and so on for
-the next circle, _I N_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 118.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 119.]
-
-EX. 15.--_To construct a triangle on a given base, the sides being
-given._
-
-First. An equilateral triangle, Fig. 118. On the ends of a given base _A
-B_, with _A B_ as a radius describe arcs cutting at _C_, and draw _A C_,
-_C B_.
-
-Second. Triangle of unequal sides, Fig. 119. On either end of the base
-_A D_, with the side _B_ as a radius describe an arc; and with the side
-_C_ as a radius, on the other end of the base as a center, describe arcs
-cutting the arc at _E_; join _A E_, _D E_.
-
-This construction may be used for finding the position of a point _C_ or
-_E_ at given distances from the ends of a base, not necessarily to form
-a triangle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 120.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 121.]
-
-EX. 16.--_To construct a square rectangle on a given straight line._
-
-First. A square, Fig. 120. On the ends _B A_ as centers, with the line
-_A B_ as radius, describe arcs cutting at _C_; on _C_ describe arcs
-cutting the others at _D E_; and on _D_ and _E_ cut these at _F G_. Draw
-_A F_, _B G_ and join the intersections _H I_.
-
-Second. A rectangle, Fig. 121. On the base _E F_ draw the perpendiculars
-_E H_, _F G_, equal to the height of the rectangle, and join _G H_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 122.]
-
-EX. 17.--_To construct a parallelogram of which the sides and one of the
-angles are given_, Fig. 122. Draw the side _D E_ equal to the given
-length _A_, and set off the other side _D F_ equal to the other length
-_B_, forming the given angle _C_. From _E_ with _D F_ as radius,
-describe an arc, and from _F_, with the radius _D E_ cut the arc at _G_.
-Draw _F G_, _E G_. Or, the remaining sides may be drawn as parallels to
-_D E_, _D F_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 123.]
-
-EX. 18.--_To describe a circle about a triangle_, Fig. 123. Bisect two
-sides _A B_, _A C_ of the triangle at _E F_, and from these points draw
-perpendiculars cutting at _K_. On the center _K_, with the radius _K A_
-draw the circle _A B C_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 124.]
-
-EX. 19.--_To describe a circle about a square, and to inscribe a square
-in a circle_, Fig. 124.
-
-First. To describe the circle. Draw the diagonals _A B_, _C D_ of the
-square, cutting at _E_; on the center _E_ with the radius _E A_ describe
-the circle.
-
-Second. To inscribe the square. Draw the two diameters _A B_, _C D_ at
-right angles and join the points _A B_, _C D_ to form the square.
-
-_In the same way a circle may be described about a triangle._
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 125.]
-
-EX. 20.--_To inscribe a circle on a square, and to describe a square
-about a circle_, Fig. 125.
-
-First. To inscribe the circle. Draw the diagonals _A B_, _C D_ of the
-square, cutting at _E_; draw the perpendicular _E F_ to one side, and
-with the radius _E F_ describe the circle.
-
-Second. To describe the square. Draw two diameters _A B_, _C D_ at right
-angles, and produce them; bisect the angle _D E B_ at the center by the
-diameter _F G_, and through _F_ and _G_ draw perpendiculars _A C_, _B
-D_, and join the points _A D_ and _B C_ where they cut the diagonals to
-complete the square.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 126.]
-
-EX. 21.--_To inscribe a circle in a triangle_, Fig. 126. Bisect two of
-the angles _A C_ of the triangle by lines cutting at _D_; from _D_ draw
-a perpendicular _D E_ to any side, and with _D E_ as radius describe a
-circle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 127.]
-
-EX. 22.--_To inscribe a pentagon in a circle_, Fig. 127. Draw two
-diameters _A C_, _B D_ at right angles cutting at _O_; bisect _A O_ at
-_E_, and from _B_ with radius _B E_ cut the circumference at _G H_ and
-with the same radius step round the circle to _I_ and _K_; join the
-points to form the pentagon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 128.]
-
-EX. 23.--_To construct a hexagon upon a given straight line_, Fig. 128.
-From _A_ and _B_, the ends of the given line, describe arcs cutting at
-_G_; from _G_ with the radius _G A_ describe a circle. With the same
-radius set off the arcs _A C_, _C F_ and _B D_, _D E_; join the points
-so found to form the hexagon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 129.]
-
-EX. 24.--_To inscribe a hexagon in a circle_, Fig. 129. Draw a diameter
-_A C B_; from _A_ and _B_ as centers, with the radius of the circle _A
-C_ cut the circumference at _D_, _E_, _F_, _G_, and draw _A D_, _D E_,
-etc., to form the hexagon. The points _D E_, etc., may be found by
-stepping the radius (with the dividers) six times round the circle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 130.]
-
-EX. 25.--_To describe an octagon on a given straight line_, Fig. 130.
-Produce the given line _A B_ both ways and draw perpendiculars _A E_, _B
-F_; bisect the external angles _A_ and _B_ by the lines _A H_, _B C_,
-which make equal to _A B_. Draw _C D_ and _H G_ parallel to _A E_ and
-equal to _A B_; from the center _G D_, with the radius _A B_, cut the
-perpendiculars at _E F_, and draw _E F_ to complete the hexagon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 131.]
-
-EX. 26.--_To convert a square into an octagon_, Fig. 131.--Draw the
-diagonals of the square cutting at _E_; from the corners _A_, _B_, _C_,
-_D_, with _A E_ as radius, describe arcs cutting the sides at _G_, _H_,
-etc., and join the points so found to complete the octagon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 132.]
-
-EX. 27.--_To inscribe an octagon in a circle_, Fig. 132. Draw two
-diameters _A C_, _B D_, at right angles; bisect the arcs _A B_, _B C_,
-at _E_, _F_, etc., to form the octagon.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 133.]
-
-EX. 28.--_To describe an octagon about a circle_, Fig. 133. Describe a
-square about the given circle _A B_, draw perpendiculars _H_ and _K_, to
-the diagonals, touching the circle to form the octagon. Or, the points
-_H_, _K_, etc., may be found by cutting the sides from the corners, by
-lines parallel to the diagonals.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 134.]
-
-EX. 29.--_To describe an ellipse when the length and breadth are given_,
-Fig. 134. On the center _C_, with _A E_ as radius, cut the axis _A B_ at
-_F_ and _G_, the foci, fix a couple of pins into the axis at _F_ and
-_G_, and loop on a thread or cord upon them equal in length to the axis
-_A B_, so as when stretched to reach the extremity _C_ of the conjugate
-axis, as shown in dot-lining. Place a pencil or drawpoint inside the
-cord, as at _H_, and guiding the pencil in this way, keeping the cord
-equally in tension, carry the pencil round the pins _F_, _G_, and so
-describe the ellipse.
-
- NOTE.--The ellipse is an oval figure, like a circle in perspective.
- The line that divides it equally in the direction of its great length
- is the _transverse axis_, and the line which divides the opposite way
- is the _conjugate axis_.
-
-_Second Method._ Along the straight edge of a piece of stiff paper mark
-off a distance _a c_ equal to _A C_, half the transverse axis; and from
-the same point a distance _a b_ equal to _C D_, half the conjugate axis.
-Place the slip so as to bring the point _b_ on the line _A B_ of the
-transverse axis, and the point _c_ on the line _D E_; and set off on the
-drawing the position of the point _a_. Shifting the slip, so that the
-point travels on the transverse axis, and the point _c_ on the conjugate
-axis, any number of points in the curve may be found, through which the
-curve may be traced. See fig. 135.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 135.]
-
-
-Trigonometry.
-
-Trigonometry is that portion of geometry which has for its object the
-measurement of triangles. When it treats of plane triangles, it is
-called _Plane Trigonometry_; and as the engineer will continually meet
-in his studies of higher mathematics _the terms_ used in plane
-trigonometry, it is advantageous for him to become familiar with some of
-the principles and definitions relating to this branch of mathematics.
-
-The circumferences of all circles contain the same number of degrees,
-but the greater the radius the greater is the absolute measures of a
-degree. The circumference of a fly wheel or the circumference of the
-earth have the same number of degrees; yet the same number of degrees in
-each and every circumference is the measure of precisely the same angle.
-
-The circumference of a circle is supposed to be divided into 360 degrees
-or divisions, and as the total angularity about the center is equal to
-four right angles, each right angle contains 90 degrees, or 90°, and
-half a right angle contains 45°. Each degree is divided into 60 minutes,
-or 60′; and for the sake of still further minuteness of measurement,
-each minute is divided into 60″. In a whole circle there are, therefore,
-360 × 60 × 60 = 1,296,000 seconds. The annexed diagram, fig. 136,
-exemplifies the relative positions of the
-
- Sine,
- Co-sine,
- Versed Sine,
-
- Tangent,
- Co-Tangent,
- Secant and
- Co-secant
-
-of an angle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 136.]
-
-These may be defined thus:
-
-
-DEFINITIONS.
-
-1. The _Complement_ of an arc is 90° minus the arc.
-
-2. The _Supplement_ of an arc is 180° minus the arc.
-
-3. The _Sine_ of an angle, or of an arc, is a line drawn from one end of
-an arc, perpendicular to a diameter drawn through the other end.
-
-4. The _Cosine_ of an arc is the perpendicular distance from the center
-of the circle to the sine of the arc; or, it is the same in magnitude as
-the sine of the complement of the arc.
-
-5. The _Tangent_ of an arc is a line touching the circle in one
-extremity of the arc, and continued from thence, to meet a line drawn
-through the center and the other extremity.
-
-6. The _Cotangent_ of an arc is the tangent of the complement of the
-arc. The _Co_ is but a contraction of the word complement.
-
-7. The _Secant_ of an arc is a line drawn from the center of the circle
-to the extremity of the tangent.
-
-8. The _Cosecant_ of an arc is the secant of the complement.
-
-9. The _Versed Sine_ of an arc is the distance from the extremity of the
-arc to the foot of the sine.
-
-For the sake of brevity, these technical terms are contracted thus: for
-sine _A B_, we write _sin. A B_; for cosine _A B_, we write _cos. A B_;
-for tangent _A B_, we write _tan. A B_, etc.
-
-
-[Illustration: INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 137.]
-
-
-
-
-Drawing Materials and Instruments.
-
-
-Drawing tools or instruments are contrived solely for mechanical
-drawing; aside from this use they are perfectly worthless, hence the
-quality of these special utensils is a matter of the first consideration
-to the earnest student.
-
-There are several degrees of excellence to be found in the make-up of
-drawing instruments and materials; it may be remarked with truth that
-“any kind are good enough, and the best none too good,” i. e., a learner
-in this delightful art should not stop at the lack of goodness or the
-low grade existing in his “tools,” but rather do the best work possible
-with the means at hand.
-
-However, in order that acceptable work may be accomplished, fairly good
-instruments should be procured. The advice of some one experienced in
-the use and care of draughting tools should be sought before purchasing.
-A drawing board, a single sheet of paper and a pencil is the simplest
-“outfit” to be thought of; to this small beginning may be added, soon
-afterwards, an inexpensive pair of compasses, a T-square and a couple of
-triangles; a vast range of work can be executed with these few tools.
-
-Nothing else will be needed to do fine work except, perhaps, one or two
-pairs of better compasses and a few sweeps or means of drawing irregular
-curves; all these had best be purchased separately; for in buying a “box
-of instruments,” it may contain some articles which are not desired, or
-that are of a wrong size, or even duplicates of those already possessed.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 138.]
-
-An outfit recommended by the author of “Reed’s Hand Book” is as follows.
-
-Large compasses with movable leg.
-
-A pair of dividers.
-
-Bow pencil.
-
-Bow pen.
-
-Pencil leg for large compasses.
-
-Pen leg for large compasses.
-
-Drawing pen.
-
-Louis Rouillon, B. S., Instructor of Drawing in Pratt Institute, New
-York, recommends the following:
-
-Compasses, 5¹⁄₂ inches, with needle point; pen pencil and lengthening
-bar.
-
-Drawing pen, 4¹⁄₂ inches.
-
-T-square, 24-inch blade.
-
-45-degree triangle, 9 inches.
-
-30 and 60 degree triangle, 9 inches.
-
-1 Scroll.
-
-Dixon’s V. H. pencil.
-
-12-inch boxwood scale, flat, graduated ¹⁄₁₆ inch the entire length.
-
-Bottle of liquid India ink, four thumb-tacks, pen and ink eraser.
-
-20 sheets drawing paper, 11 × 15 inches, and a drawing-board about 16 ×
-23 inches will also be necessary; students can usually make the board
-themselves for less money than it can be bought.
-
- NOTE.--The purchasing of drawing tools is one of the most difficult
- points to settle that can present itself to a person about to buy a
- drawing outfit for the first time. Nothing can be so productive of
- distress to a person drawing as to have his tools getting out of
- order, joints one day too tight, next day too slack, points getting
- blunt or perhaps turning up altogether; if needle points, then the
- needles slip up, and drawing spoiled; in fact, the purchaser can be
- annoyed in numberless different ways.--W. H. THORN.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 139.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 140.]
-
-
-THE DRAWING BOARD.
-
-A drawing-board should be made of well seasoned pine of a convenient
-size, say 23 × 16, which will take half a sheet of imperial paper,
-leaving ¹⁄₂-inch margin all around.
-
-The working surface of the board--or its front side--should be perfectly
-smooth, but instead of being flat it should have a very slight camber,
-or rounding, breadthways, this latter feature in its construction being
-to prevent the possibility of a sheet of paper when stretched on its
-surface having any vacuity beneath it.
-
-The _four edges_ of the board need not form an exact rectangle, as much
-valuable time is often wasted in the attempts to produce such a board;
-but it will answer every purpose of the draughtsman so long as the
-adjacent edges at the lower left-hand corner of it are at right angles,
-or square to each other.
-
-An English authority recommends the use of two drawing-boards, 42 inches
-long and 30 inches wide, made of plain stuff, without cleets, 1¹⁄₄
-inches thick--seasoned--with edges perfectly straight and at right
-angles to each other. _With two boards, one may be used for sketching
-and drawing details and the other for the finished drawing._
-
-The board should be ³⁄₄ inch in thickness, and fitted at the back, at
-right angles to its longest side, with a couple of hardwood battens,
-about 2 inches wide and ³⁄₄ inch thick; the use of these battens being
-to keep the board from casting or winding and to allow of its expansion
-or contraction through changes of temperature. This latter purpose,
-however, is only effected by attaching the battens to the back of the
-board in the following manner: ... At the middle of the length of each
-batten--which should be one inch less than the width of the board--a
-stout, well-fitted wood screw is firmly inserted into it, and made to
-penetrate the board for about ¹⁄₂ inch, the head of the screw being made
-flush with the surface of the batten; on either side of the central
-screw, two others, about 3¹⁄₂ inches apart, are passed through oblong
-holes in the battens, and screwed into the body of the board until their
-heads are flush with the central one; fitted in this way the board
-itself can expand or contract lengthwise or crosswise, while its surface
-is prevented from warping or bending.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 141.]
-
-A further improvement in such a drawing board as above shown is made by
-cutting lengthwise along its ends a narrow groove and inserting an ebony
-or hardwood strip; this is cut or sawn apart at about every inch to
-admit of contraction; this strip serves as a guide to the stock of the
-drawing square, allowing an easy sliding movement.
-
-To produce really good work in the shape of a mechanical drawing, one
-perfect straight edge only is required on a drawing board, and that the
-left one, which is always known as the _working-edge_; but for the
-convenience of being able to draw a long line across the board at right
-angles to its lower edge, this edge is made truly square with that on
-the left side of the board.
-
-The details for building these drawing boards are given, because they
-are easy to be made by one who understands the use of a few wood-working
-tools; while the boards themselves are difficult of transportation--in
-case of the change of residence of their owners--quite unlike the
-instruments which are to accompany them.
-
-Fig. 141 represents the board which has been described in the text, with
-provisions for the contraction and expansion; the very dark lines are
-intended to represent the ebony insertions--as described. Fig. 140
-represents a plain pine board with dovetailed battens.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 142.]
-
-Fig. 142 represents the common means used to attach or secure slightly
-or temporarily the drawing paper to the drawing board; these are called
-thumb-tacks, and are usually forced through the paper into the wood by
-the hand, whence they are easily detached. These are made to have as
-slight a projection as may be, so as not to interfere with the free
-movement of the tee-square.
-
-For mechanical drawing the invariable practice is to secure the paper on
-which the drawing is to be made to the drawing board by pinning it; this
-is effected by various kinds of _drawing pins_ or _thumb-tacks_.
-
-The best kind for this purpose have a head as thin as possible without
-cutting at its edges, slightly concave on the under side next the paper,
-and only so much convex on its upper side as will give it sufficient
-thickness to enable the pin to be secured to it; better use four or more
-small pins along the edge of a sheet of paper, than use one clumsy,
-badly made pin at each end.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 143.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 144.]
-
-Fig. 143 and fig. 144 represent a pair of plain trestles or horses in
-common use for supporting large size drawing boards. This pattern is
-found frequently in the laying-out shop. Fig. 145 and fig. 146 represent
-_adjustable_ horses or trestles--these are designed, primarily, for
-office use. As will be seen by viewing the illustration, the upper part
-is supported by two hard-wood sliding pieces; these are provided with
-strong pins and numerous holes, and pass through the frame of the
-trestle, as shown, so that the upper portions can be arranged at any
-angle convenient to the draughtsman, as he lies over his work or stands
-by it.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 145.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 146.]
-
-Fig. 137 is introduced to exhibit the paper attached to the drawing
-board with the thumb-tacks, and with the T-square and set-squares
-arranged to commence work; the paper should not extend to the edges of
-the board; three, four or more tacks may be used on each edge of the
-sheet of paper, instead of two, as shown in illustration.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 147.]
-
-A most convenient--and except for its extreme lightness, which is not
-good in a drawing stand--a most admirable device is shown in fig. 138.
-The drawing table is simply a drawing board with folding legs; these are
-made from hard-wood, while the top is made of soft, seasoned pine, with
-square corners; while the device is strong and well braced, it can be
-folded and easily carried about--all as shown in the illustration.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 148.]
-
-
-THE TEE-SQUARE.
-
-This is an instrument in the form of a letter T, as shown in the figures
-149 and 150; the two parts are known as _stock_ and _blade_; the
-horizontal part of the letter (T) is the stock, and the vertical part
-the blade--hence the name, T-square; to form the square, the two parts
-are joined together in such a way as to make them exactly at right
-angles to each other; the stock, which is applied to the working edge of
-the drawing board, being about one-third the length of the blade, and
-about three times its thickness.
-
-[Illustration: Figs. 149 and 150.]
-
-To be perfect in construction, a tee-square should be as light as is
-consistent with its necessary strength and stiffness of parts; it should
-be made of suitable material easily manufactured, put together, and
-repaired, and withal as truly correct as is possible to be made. Such a
-square is represented in fig. 148; it has a taper blade, which is
-generally about double the width where secured to the stock as it is at
-the end.
-
-[Illustration: Figs. 151 and 152.]
-
-The manner in which the stock is united to the blade determines its
-adaptability or otherwise to the use made of it; in some the stock is
-rectangular in section, and the blade mortised into it; in others the
-blade is dovetailed and let into the stock for the whole of its
-thickness.
-
-
-ADJUSTABLE BLADED SQUARE.
-
-In cases where many parallel lines have to be drawn, of lengths beyond
-the capabilities of ordinary set-squares, and in directions other than
-square with or parallel to the working edge of the drawing board it is
-convenient to have for use an _adjustable_ bladed tee-square, or one
-whose blade can be set at any desired angle. The blade of such a square
-should be tapered as in illustration, but shaped at its wide end as
-shown, and having a stock wide enough to allow for the surface required
-in the washers of the fittings necessary to make the blade adjustable.
-These fittings, though requiring to be well made and neatly finished,
-are not expensive or difficult to make, as they consist merely of two
-washers, a square-necked bolt, and a fly nut.
-
-The tee-square, as shown, has four parts: 1, blade; 2, fixed head; 3,
-shifting head; 4, swivel. The head is held firmly by the left hand to
-the left edge of the drawing board, and the blade serves as a
-straight-edge for horizontal lines that may extend the whole length of
-the paper. It can be used for either horizontal, or, by reversing to the
-bottom of the board, for vertical lines; and, by turning it over, so
-that the shifting head is against the edge of the drawing board instead
-of the fixed head, lines at different angles may be drawn. The length of
-the blade should be the length of the drawing board; if it is shorter,
-inconvenience will be experienced when lines the whole length of the
-board are wanted.
-
-
-TRIANGLES, OR SET-SQUARES.
-
-Set-squares are invariably used in connection with the tee-square, as
-shown in fig. 148. The illustrations below show several patterns of the
-device; by these, vertical lines, triangles, squares and hexagonal,
-octagonal and twelve-sided figures, diagonal section lines, etc., can be
-easily drawn. For ordinary purposes, a triangle or set-square with
-angles of 45° may be 4 inches long and the other 8 inches in length, but
-a six-inch set-square having angles 90°, 45° and 45°, and an eight-inch
-one having angles of 90°, 60° and 30°, will be found sufficient for all
-purposes; there are other triangles used specially for making letters.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 153.--Fig. 154.--Fig. 155.--Fig. 156.]
-
-In practice the triangles or set-squares are slid along the edge of the
-blade, and need not be any thicker than it.
-
-
-PARALLEL RULE.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 157.]
-
-This instrument is used to mark lines which are neither horizontal nor
-vertical (usually these are drawn by the square and set-square), and
-which are parallel to one another; by adjusting the edge of the parallel
-ruler to a line, it can be extended or opened out (or vice-versa
-closed), and the line or lines drawn will be parallel or equally distant
-from the base or first line it was set by. See fig. 157.
-
-Fig. 158 is a parallel ruler, constructed with two rollers fixed on a
-rod so that they move the same distance, carrying the ruler parallel to
-the starting line.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 158.]
-
- NOTE.--It has been said that “a workman may be known by his tools,”
- but the statement must be taken with a good deal of allowance. Some
- workmen may possess a very fine set of tools and never use them,
- because they have not the ability or inclination to learn how;
- especially is this the case with drawing instruments.
-
- If all the fine sets of drawing instruments that are owned by workmen
- were put to frequent use the owners would find a marked improvement in
- their abilities in other lines as well as drawing; for it is a
- noticeable fact that when a person’s mind has been trained in a
- business that requires close calculation and a knowledge of materials,
- he is capable of showing good qualifications in other lines, and the
- more skilled he is in one the easier can he acquire skillfulness in
- another, if he applies the same amount of energy, thought and interest
- as he did to acquire skill in the first.
-
-
-SECTION LINER.
-
-Fig. 159 shows an improved section liner which can be adjusted to any
-angle, and will space the parallel lines at any desired regular
-distance.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 159.]
-
-
-IRREGULAR CURVE OR SCROLL.
-
-Irregular curves, or, as they are sometimes termed, sweeps, represented
-by figs. 160-166, are used for curves that cannot be put in by the other
-instruments. They are very useful when elliptical or parabolic curves
-are desired, in preference to circles or arcs of a circle. They are much
-used in design and architectural drawing. They are made of thin hardwood
-or rubber, and sometimes of horn.
-
-[Illustration: Figs. 160-166.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 167.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 168.]
-
-Curves are irregular lines; a circle is a regular line. If a curve is to
-be passed through a number of predetermined points it should be first
-sketched in lightly, free-hand; a section of the scroll is then applied
-to the curve so as to embrace as many points as possible; only the
-central points of those thus embraced should be inked in; this process
-is continued until the desired curve is completed.
-
-Curves are made of various material, pearwood, cardboard, xylonite, hard
-rubber, and a strip of soft lead is sometimes used, which may be easily
-adjusted to the curve required.
-
-The curves generally used in mechanical drawing are shown on previous
-page.
-
-Fig. 208, page 134, is a logarithmic _spiral_ curve. It is
-mathematically constructed and contains every curve within the limit of
-its size.
-
-
-ELLIPSES.
-
-An ellipse is a geometrical figure, and can be drawn as described in
-geometrical problem 29, page 96; many drawing offices keep sets of hard
-rubber ellipses, to economize time constructing them.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 169.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 170.]
-
-
-DRAWING PENCILS.
-
-These are instruments for marking, drawing or writing, formed of
-graphite, colored chalk or materials of similar properties, and having a
-tapering end, inclosed, generally, in a cylinder of softwood. Fig. 167
-represents a ruling pencil; its point is a parallelogram or of a wedge
-shape. In ruling, the length view rests against the square; its shape
-gives considerable strength to the lead and allows the making of a very
-fine line. Fig. 168 differs in the point of the pencil shown, as may be
-observed in the illustration.
-
-A pencil that is hard is best for mechanical drawing; one that will
-retain a good point for some considerable time. Pencil lines should be
-made as light as possible; the presence of lead on the surface of the
-paper tends to prevent the ink passing to the paper, and in rubbing out
-pencil lines the ink is reduced in blackness, and the surface of paper
-is roughened, which is a disadvantage. As little erasing or rubbing out
-as possible should be done.
-
-
-DIVIDERS AND COMPASSES.
-
-These instruments, while they appear alike, have a separate use: the
-dividers are used to space off distances and dimensions; especially are
-they necessary in reading drawings made to scale. _Compasses_ are used
-for describing circles, curves, etc., _dividers_ are used for marking
-out spaces.
-
-Two forms of the dividers are shown in figs. 169 and 170; the simplest,
-plainest form is shown in fig. 169; these are used for rough spacings;
-fig. 170 represents a pair of dividers fitted with an adjustable screw
-controlled by a steel spring in one leg; by this a very exact
-measurement can be made. Fig. 170 is intended to exhibit what is called
-a “hair-spring divider.”
-
-
-PROPORTIONAL DIVIDERS.
-
-These dividers differ from the ordinary ones shown in figs. 169 and 170
-in that they are provided with four steel points, one pair of which
-being set to the full dimension will be reproduced by the other pair,
-but in a smaller, or reduced size.
-
-Fig. 171 are “bisecting” dividers, being proportional dividers, which,
-when open, one end measures double the distance of the other.
-
-Fig. 172 are proportional dividers; the points at one end are capable of
-being changed, to measure practically any desired proportion at the
-other end, by altering the position of the pivot where the legs cross
-one another. The lower connecting link is a micrometer adjustment, for
-minute measurements.
-
-Fig. 173 are proportional dividers which are marked for the proportions
-of lines and radii of circles, being provided with a rack movement for
-adjustment.
-
-Fig. 174 represents three-leg dividers, used for taking the position of
-three points; this instrument is very useful in finding the position of
-a point in a figure.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 171.--Fig. 172.--Fig. 173.--Fig. 174.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 175.--Fig. 176.--Fig. 177.--Fig. 178.--Fig. 179.]
-
-
-COMPASSES.
-
-Compasses consist of two pointed legs; they are instruments for
-describing circles or for--sometimes--measuring figures, in absence of
-dividers. Fig. 175 represents compasses fitted as dividers.
-
-Compasses should have jointed legs, which will allow the points to be
-placed at right angles to the paper, whatever the size of the circle to
-be drawn. Compasses should not be used for circles which are too large
-to allow the points to be thus placed; a lengthening bar is generally
-provided, which greatly increases the diameters of circles which may be
-drawn by this attachment; it is shown in fig. 176.
-
-One leg of the compasses is usually provided with a socket to which are
-fitted three points: a divider point, fig. 179; a pencil point, fig.
-177; and a point, fig. 178, carrying a special pen for the inking of
-circles. Each of these points is generally provided with a joint, so
-that it may be placed at right angles to the paper.
-
-The other leg should be jointed; it is often provided with a socket
-which receives two points, one a divider point, and the other carrying a
-needle point. Such an instrument may be used as dividers for spacing, or
-as compasses for penciling or inking circles.
-
-The joint at the head of the compasses (see fig. 175) is the most
-important feature. It should hold the legs firmly in any position, so
-that in going over a circle several times only one line will result. It
-should allow the legs to move smoothly and evenly, and should be capable
-of adjustment.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 180.--Fig. 181.--Fig. 182.--Fig. 183.--Fig. 184.]
-
-As shown in fig. 174, one leg has a hinge or joint, and a needle point,
-which can be regulated by a thumb screw; the other leg has a socket or
-recess into which interchangeable parts can be inserted. The four
-figures to the right of the compasses show the parts which are provided
-with shanks or insertion pieces. Fig. 180 and fig. 181 represent
-compasses specially used for making small circles, and work too minute
-for the larger instruments described above.
-
-To do work of this nature easily a pair of spring dividers are
-frequently used. This instrument has one point attached to a spring,
-which is regulated by a screw, so that very slight changes in the space
-may be made with ease.
-
-Compasses specially used for putting in fine circles and dimensions are
-called “bows.” When a pen point it is a “bow pen,” with a pencil point a
-“bow pencil,” and if with needle point a “bow dividers.” Fig. 180 is a
-“bow dividers”, this fitted with screw for fine adjustment in one leg,
-fig. 181, is called a “hair-spring bow dividers”; for small details,
-bows with steel spring legs without any joint are used; these are called
-“steel-spring bows.”
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 185.--Fig. 186.--Fig. 187.]
-
-
-SPRING BOWS.
-
-These were originally developed from the common form of compasses, with
-a single spring leg; later, the demand for smaller sizes made changes
-necessary, and spring bows are now made symmetrical, both sides of the
-bow being made to “spring.”
-
-Fig. 182 are spring dividers.
-
-Fig. 183 is a spring pencil.
-
-Fig. 184 is a spring pen.
-
-In these figures it will be seen that the two threads, a right and a
-left, are moved with one central thumbscrew; in the figs. 185 to 187 a
-single screw is used.
-
-In choosing spring bows, care must be exercised to select a sufficiently
-strong, stiff spring, as the relation between spring pressure and
-thumbscrew is important.
-
-
-BEAM COMPASSES AND TRAMMELS.
-
-In fig. 188 is shown a set of beam compasses, together with a portion of
-the wooden rod or beam on which they are used.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 188.]
-
-The latter, as will be seen by the section drawn to one side, _A_, is in
-the shape of a T. This form has considerable strength and rigidity. Beam
-compasses are provided with extra points for pencil or ink work, as
-shown.
-
-While the general adjustment is effected by means of the clamp against
-the wood, minute variations are made by the screw, _B_, shifting one of
-the points, as shown in the figure.
-
-This instrument is quite delicate, and, when in good order, is very
-accurate. It should be used only for fine work on paper, and never for
-scribing on metal.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 189.]
-
-A coarser instrument, and one especially designed for use upon metal, is
-shown in fig. 189, and is called a trammel. There are various forms of
-this instrument, all being the same in principle. The engraving shows a
-form in common use. A heavier stick is used with it than with the beam
-compasses, and no other adjustment is provided than that which is
-afforded by clamping against the stick.
-
-In the illustration, a carrier at the side is shown, in which a pencil
-may be placed. Some trammels are arranged in such a manner, that either
-of the points may be detached and a pencil substituted.
-
-A trammel, by careful arrangement, can be made to describe very accurate
-curves, and hence can be used in place of the beam compasses in many
-instances. For all coarse work it is to be preferred to beam compasses.
-It is useful for all short sweeps upon sheets of metal, but for curves
-of a very long radius a strip of sheet iron or a piece of wire will be
-found of a more practical service than even this tool.
-
-The length of rods for both beam compasses and tramels, up to certain
-limits, is determined by the nature of the work to be done. The extreme
-length is determined by the strength and rigidity of the rod itself. It
-is usually convenient to have two rods for each instrument, one about
-1¹⁄₂ or 2 feet in length and the other considerably longer--as long as
-the strength of the material will admit.
-
-
-DRAWING SCALES.
-
-Scales are proportioned rules or mathematical instruments of wood,
-metal, etc., on which are marked lines and figures for the purpose of
-measuring sizes and distances. It is usual to make scales in the
-proportion of parts of an inch equalling a foot; the most generally
-adopted scale for machine drawing is one and a half inches, equalling
-one foot; that is, twelve-eighths of an inch (each eighth of an inch
-representing one inch); there is no fixed rule in the choice of a scale,
-as they are varied according to the coarseness or fineness of the parts
-of the machine to be drawn and the space or surface of paper to be
-utilized.
-
-When objects are of moderate proportions they may be represented full
-size; but when large, the drawings must be smaller. Standard scales for
-mechanical drawings are ¹⁄₂, ¹⁄₄, ¹⁄₈ and ¹⁄₁₆ full size. These scales
-are often written 6″ = 1 ft.; 3″ = 1 ft.; 1¹⁄₂″ = 1 ft., and ³⁄₄″ = 1
-ft.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 190.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 191.]
-
-Instead of selecting one of the scales named or one found upon the
-ordinary scales used by draughtsmen, drawings may be made to any scale
-whatever. Thus, if any object is to be represented in a certain space, a
-scale should be constructed which will cause the whole of the object to
-be shown.
-
-Drawing to Scale.--The meaning of this is, that the drawing when done
-bears a definite proportion to the full size of the particular part, or,
-in other words, is precisely the same as it would appear if viewed
-through a diminishing glass.
-
-The two-foot rule shown in fig. 192 is the most useful instrument for
-the comparison of linear dimensions--it can be used as a scale of
-one-twelfth, or 1 inch equal to a foot, 12 inches = 12 feet, it being
-divided into portions or spaces, each of which is subdivided into
-halves, quarters, eighths and sixteenths; frequently in the latter class
-of two-foot rules there are graduations of scales, and it is then also
-called a draughting scale.
-
-Fig. 190 represents a flat scale, graded so that one inch represents a
-foot--¹⁄₁₂th size--etc., as shown.
-
-Fig. 191 represents a triangular scale (broken). The triangular scale
-should read on its different edges as follows: Three inches and 1¹⁄₂″ to
-one foot, 1″ and ¹⁄₂″ to one foot, ³⁄₄″ and ³⁄₈″ to one foot, ¹⁄₄″ and
-¹⁄₈″ to one foot, ³⁄₁₆″ and ³⁄₃₂″ to one foot, and one edge read
-sixteenths the whole 12″ of its length.
-
-Fig. 190 shows such a scale broken. An explanation of the 1″ and ¹⁄₂″
-side will suffice for all. Where it is used as a scale of 1″ to one
-foot, each large space, as from 0 to 12 or 0 to 1, represents a foot,
-and is a foot at that scale. There being 12″ in one foot, the twelve
-long divisions at the left represent inches; each inch is divided into
-two equal parts, so from 0 to one division at the left of 9 is 9¹⁄₂″ and
-so on. The 1″ and ¹⁄₂″ scales being at opposite ends of the same edge,
-it is obvious that one foot on the 1″ scale is equal to two feet on the
-¹⁄₂″ scale, and conversely, one foot on the ¹⁄₂″ scale is equal to six
-inches on the 1″ scale; and 1″ being equal to one foot, the total feet
-in length of scale will be 12; at ¹⁄₂″ to 1 foot the total feet will be
-24.
-
-In working to regular scales, such as ¹⁄₂, ¹⁄₈, or ¹⁄₁₆ size, a good
-plan is to use a common rule, instead of a graduated scale. There is
-nothing more convenient for a mechanical draughtsman than to be able to
-readily resolve dimensions into various scales, and the use of a common
-rule for fractional scales trains the mind, so that computations come
-naturally, and after a time almost without effort.
-
-The protractor shown in fig. 193 is an instrument for laying down and
-measuring angles on paper; it is used in connecting with a scale to
-define the inclination of one line to another.
-
-Protractors have the degrees of a half circle marked upon them; as the
-whole circle contains 360 degrees, half of it will contain 180,
-one-quarter 90, etc. Hence, protractors showing 180° exhibit all that is
-needed. To protract means to extend, so this instrument is also useful
-in “extending” the lines of inclination at the circle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 192.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 193.]
-
-
-DRAWING-PENS.
-
-A special pen called a drawing-pen, and also special ink, are required
-to ink a drawing; figs. 194 and 195 represent two sizes of
-drawing-pens--one being best adapted for fine work, and the other for
-coarse or heavy line work. The points, as will be observed in the
-illustration, are made of two steel blades which open and close as
-required for thickness of lines by a regulating screw.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 194.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 195.]
-
-A good drawing pen should be made of properly tempered steel, neither
-too soft nor hardened to brittleness. The nibs should be accurately set,
-both of the same length, and both equally firm when in contact with the
-drawing paper. The points should be so shaped that they are fine enough
-to admit of absolute control of the contact of the pen in starting and
-ending lines, but otherwise as broad and rounded as possible, in order
-to hold a convenient quantity of ink without dropping it. The lower
-(under) blade should be sufficiently firm to prevent the closing of the
-blades of the pen, when using the pen against a straightedge.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 196.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 197.]
-
-The spring of the pen, which separates the two blades, should be strong
-enough to hold the upper blade in its position, but not so strong that
-it would interfere with easy adjustment by the thumbscrew. The thread of
-the thumbscrew must be deeply and evenly cut so as not to strip.
-
-An important requisite after the pencil lines have been put in is ink,
-with which to line the drawing. This should be of the best that can be
-procured. The pen is filled by dropping the ink between the blades, or
-nibs, while held in a nearly vertical position, as shown in fig. 196.
-
-Liquid India ink can be procured in bottles with glass tube feeders,
-which are very good, and keep the hands and fingers free of the ink.
-Fig. 197 is a sectional view of such a bottle and “filler,” or feeder.
-This generally answers all requirements, but the dry ink of good
-quality, in sticks or bars, cannot be surpassed, although it requires
-skill for its preparation. Fig. 198 represents a sloping dish or “tile”
-for mixing, which should be done with little pressure, in clean,
-filtered or distilled water, care being taken to keep the liquid free of
-dust, which obstructs the free flow of the ink in the pens.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 198.]
-
-The bars of India ink are shown, as they are imported, in figs. 199 to
-202.
-
-Pure India or China ink is only made in those countries, because the
-special wood from which it is prepared is found only in those regions.
-So-called India inks, made of lampblack and animal glue, are only
-imitations; therefore India ink should be purchased from a reliable
-importing house--shape is little guarantee of quality.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 199.--Fig. 200.--Fig. 201.--Fig. 202.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 203.]
-
-Soft gray vulcanized rubber (fig. 203) should be used for cleaning
-drawing paper; for erasing any portion of a line in pencil, a piece of
-prepared white vulcanized rubber is the best, small in size and of
-rectangular shape (see fig. 205).
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 204.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 205.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 206.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 207.]
-
-An ink eraser is made of a composition of rubber and ground glass, and
-it should be used as sparingly as possible on drawings, as it roughens
-the paper and removes the gloss from its surface (see fig. 204). Steel
-ink erasers are useful in removing defects, overrun lines, joint of
-lines if swollen, etc.; they have a fine point and can be used to
-advantage with a little practice; they are used with a scratching, not a
-cutting, motion (see figs. 206, 207).
-
-
-DRAWING PAPER.
-
-The first thing to be considered in selecting drawing paper is the kind
-most suitable for the proposed plan. Paper may be purchased in sheets 22
-× 30 inches, that make four exercise sheets 11 × 15 inches; this may be
-of several grades and tints.
-
-The qualities that constitute good paper are strength, uniformity of
-thickness and surface, neither repelling nor absorbing liquids,
-admitting of considerable erasing without destroying the surface, not
-becoming brittle nor discolored by reasonable exposure or age, and not
-buckling when stretched, or when ink or color is applied.
-
-The sizes and names of paper made in sheets is as follows:
-
- Cap 13×17 ins.
- Demy 15×20 „
- Medium 17×22 „
- Royal 19×24 „
- Super Royal 19×27 „
- Imperial 22×30 „
- Atlas 26×34 „
- Double Elephant 27×40 „
- Antiquarian 30×53 „
-
-For large drawings paper is made in rolls. “Detail paper” is especially
-made for marking out new designs; it is made in rolls 36, 42 and 54
-inches wide; it has excellent erasing qualities and takes ink and color
-with facility.
-
-When working by artificial light it is desirable that the paper be of a
-light-brown color, which is less trying to the eyes than a pure white.
-
-If it is a shop drawing or sketch not to be preserved, use detail paper,
-which is the most economical and will stand a great deal of handling
-without becoming soiled. If it is a detailed plan, finished drawing or a
-picture, use the best white drawing paper to be obtained, so that your
-drawings can be preserved indefinitely without danger of fading, which
-is due either to the paper being poorly made and discoloring with age,
-or being of poor fiber and absorbing the ink or color, and the drawing
-consequently losing its brightness.
-
-After deciding on the size of paper most suitable for the work, then
-carefully select the paper embracing the most qualities of value for the
-proposed drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 208.]
-
-
-[Illustration: MECHANICAL DRAWING]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 209.]
-
-
-
-
-Mechanical Drawing.
-
-
-In distinction to “free-hand,” mechanical drawing is executed almost
-entirely by the use of the instruments previously described; hence its
-other term, instrumental drawing. To define it particularly it may be
-said that,--
-
-Mechanical drawing is the correct reproduction of any figure or part of
-a machine, whether of full size or reduced in the proportion of one part
-to another; it also comprises the art of delineating the interior parts
-which are hidden from view in solid bodies.
-
-A mechanical drawing is the vehicle for conveying the ideas of the
-designer to those who are to embody them in wood and metal, and the
-considerations which should govern its production are those which affect
-its clearness and legibility or those which facilitate reference to it.
-
-Drawings consist of plans, elevations and sections; plans being views on
-the top of the object in a horizontal plane; elevations, views on the
-sides of the object in vertical planes; and sections, views taken on
-bisecting planes, at any angle through an object.
-
-Drawings in true elevation or in section are based upon flat planes, and
-given dimensions parallel to the planes in which the views are taken.
-
-Two elevations taken at right angles to each other fix all points, and
-give all dimensions of parts that have their axis parallel to the planes
-on which the views are taken; but when a machine is complex, or when
-several parts lie in the same plane, three and sometimes four views are
-required to display all the parts in a comprehensive manner.
-
-A man must have either a natural talent for hand-drawing or years of
-experience, before he can produce a sketch and “dimension” it, fit to
-work from; hence the elementary character of the examples given for
-practice. A “pretty” drawing is not expected from a beginner; it should
-always be borne in mind, that correctness of dimensions and general
-clearness, rather than elaborate finish, are what will save the battle
-in the days of competition.
-
-Mechanical drawings should be made with reference to all the processes
-that are required in the construction of the work, and the drawings
-should be responsible, not only for dimensions, but for adaptation to
-fitting, forging, pattern-making, moulding, and so on.
-
-Every part laid down should have something to govern it that may be
-termed a “base”--some position which, if understood, will suggest size,
-shape and relation to other parts. Searching after a base for each and
-every part and detail, the draughtsman should proceed upon a regular
-system, continually maintaining a test of what is done.
-
-A mechanical drawing consists chiefly of three views:
-
- 1. The plan or top view.
- 2. The side elevation.
- 3. The end elevation.
-
-In addition to the above, drawings are used to show interior portions of
-the figure; these are termed “sections,” and they may be taken where any
-plane crosses another.
-
- NOTE.--The word _elevation_, as applied to mechanical drawings, means
- simply a view; hence a side elevation is a side view, or an end
- elevation is an end view.
-
- The word _plan_ is employed in place of the word top; hence a plan
- view is a top view or a view looking down upon the top of the piece.
-
- A _general_ view means a view showing the machine put together or
- assembled, while a detail drawing is one containing a detail, as a
- part of the machine or a single piece disconnected from the other
- parts of the whole machine.
-
-
-
-
-Penciling.
-
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 211.]
-
- It is very nearly true, as has been said, that every mechanical
- drawing is, in the first instance, penciled; if this is so, then more
- work is done with the pencil than with the pen; therefore the first
- attention of the student of mechanical drawing should be directed to
- the following instructions for penciling a drawing.
-
- With all necessary materials in hand, and in good order for the
- beginning of a drawing, the first thing to do is to pin the paper on
- the board quite square.
-
- To do this effectively, lay the paper flat and put on the T-square
- with its head at the left side of the board; slide the square up
- nearly to the top, and arrange the paper level with the blade; with
- the right hand hold the paper still and move the square down a little;
- now, pin the top of the paper with thumb-tacks.
-
-Next, pressing the square lightly to the paper, slide it down to the
-bottom and pin that part of the paper to the board. The paper must not
-project outside or over the edges of the board, and the pins or
-tack-heads should be forced down flush with the paper, so as not to
-interfere with the free movement of the tee-square up and down the board
-as occasion may require.
-
-The accuracy of the work depending upon their condition, it is first
-needful to see that the pencil and pencil compasses are properly
-sharpened. Reference is made to valuable directions contained on pages
-beginning with 55, under the heading of “Free-hand Drawing,” to which
-may be added that--
-
-All lines should be drawn with the pencil slightly inclined in the
-direction in which it is moved.
-
-Any and all lines not needed in the finished drawing should be erased at
-one time after the final lines have been determined, for the surface of
-the paper is soiled very quickly when worked upon after erasures have
-been made.
-
-The working lines and other lines that are to be removed should be
-erased when the drawing is ready to finish and before its outlines have
-been strengthened, in order that the final lines may be left in perfect
-condition.
-
-To show where the lines meet or terminate it is needful that all pencil
-lines pass the actual ending place, making a distinct intersection. This
-does not apply to “inking in” the lines, but rather to prevent the
-over-drawing of the ink lines, because the edge of the rule and the pen
-itself obstruct or partly cover the view of the line, it is very liable
-to pass over or beyond the required point in inking the lines, which
-must not occur.
-
-In the preliminary operation of producing a regular mechanical or
-instrumental drawing, it is necessary to make a “sketch,” in pencil, of
-the object to be represented. The AMERICAN MACHINIST has given in a few
-words the order to be followed, in effecting the best results; we quote,
-as follows:
-
-“In making a free-hand sketch of an object from the model it is well to
-observe the following order: Look the model over carefully and determine
-the number of views necessary to illustrate it fully, drawing the same,
-free-hand, in their proper relation to each other, on sketching paper.
-Look the sketch over carefully to see that nothing has been omitted, and
-put on dimension lines, after which scale the model carefully and put on
-dimensions. Do not put in the dimensions at the same time the dimension
-lines are drawn; have all the dimension lines in place before attempting
-to insert dimensions.
-
-“Follow the same order in making the drawing with instruments as was
-used in making the sketch; that is, draw the views in their proper
-relation to each other, put in dimension lines, then dimensions, and
-lastly notes and title. If section drawing is made, do not draw section
-lines in pencil.”
-
-
-POINTS TO BE OBSERVED IN SKETCHING.
-
-1. Especial attention is to be paid to outlines--edges of plane surfaces
-are lines; when a line is made it represents the edge or outside of
-something.
-
-2. Learn to be accurate before being rapid.
-
-3. A sketch should be intelligible to any one, even if they are
-unacquainted with drawing.
-
-4. Horizontal and vertical lines and a few curves will enable one to
-make almost any simple sketch.
-
-5. It must be also remembered in making drawings from actual measurement
-that the instruments are not in the first place employed; the rough
-sketch is first made and then it is converted into a drawing. The
-draughtsman makes a rough sketch entirely by the hand and eye, measures
-the various parts, and jots down the measurements in his sketch; after
-this he reduces the whole to the desired scale, and proceeds to make his
-mechanical drawing.
-
-6. Let the sketch book be the constant companion of the student; it may
-be advantageously filled with outlines of machine or other work suitable
-for preservation, to be made into finished drawings, or for reference.
-Sketches are often valuable for reference as aids in originating new
-designs.
-
-7. A sketch, when possible, should have all the dimensions written upon
-it, but--
-
-8. Sketches in shop practice should not take the place of
-working-drawings; the latter have a check upon them in being drawn to a
-scale--hence the figures written upon them and dimensions by scale must
-agree.
-
-9. Place title and date on each sketch--no matter how seemingly
-unimportant--for future reference.
-
-10. Practice sketching at every favorable opportunity. There is no
-necessity for detail at first--simply the outlines of the article and
-its parts.
-
-11. Sketch-books, with paper bound in cloth covers, are utilized for
-bold, off-hand sketches by experienced draughtsmen, but a single sheet
-of paper, used on both sides, is not unworthy of service in an
-emergency--or even the blank side of a letter may be available.
-Sketching-blocks, or paper “pads,” 4 × 6, or more, in size, and
-containing 48 sheets, are sold by stationers, and are found to be most
-convenient to have in hand and for practical use. Portfolio-envelopes,
-made of extra length paper (manila) are useful in filing away sketches
-and drawings. The size 10¹⁄₂ × 15 is used for United States Patent
-Office drawings.
-
-The function of the pencil--in mechanical drawing--is to make a path for
-the pen to follow. If it were possible to make a drawing with all its
-lines ending at the proper place, at the first time, there would be no
-necessity for using the pencil. One is obliged, however, so to use the
-pencil that all lines pass beyond the actual ending place, thus making a
-distinct point for the drawing pen to stop at.
-
-The pencil should be pressed to the paper just enough to make a clean,
-fine line, and no more; once over the path is sufficient, if the line is
-visible and true.
-
-To sharpen drawing pencils, 1, use a fine file, after taking off enough
-of the wood with a knife; 2, make a conical point for the free-hand
-drawing pencils and a chisel point for ruling and marking distances.
-
-Pencil compasses are instruments where one leg is provided with a pencil
-point. Fig. 209 shows the mode of manipulation of those shown in fig.
-180 and fig. 181.
-
-The pencil compass is held by the projection above the joint between the
-thumb and first finger, which enables it to be rotated by a movement of
-the finger without causing any undue pressure on the points. Should much
-pressure be applied, there is a tendency to force the point or center
-through the paper, making an ugly center mark; at the same time the
-pressure tends to break off the pencil point.
-
-These few illustrations from fig. 212 to fig. 219 are made designedly
-simple, so that they may be utilized in “free-hand” work, for which they
-are good practice, as well as serving for examples in mechanical
-drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Figs. 212.]
-
-Figs. 212, showing a spool or bobbin, exhibit three views, viz.: front
-elevation or plan, and section; both are drawn with simple lines, the
-end elevation by circles.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 213.--Fig. 214.]
-
-Figs. 213 and 214 are two side views of a hexagon head bolt. Figs. 216
-and 217 are a square head bolt--two side views and end view. Figs. 218
-and 219 are a front and edge view of a forked or double joint.
-
-[Illustration: Figs. 215.]
-
-Figs. 215 show three views of a file handle; the front view and section
-are practice for compound curves and curved lines meeting straight ones;
-all these are capable of being produced by instruments.
-
-Moreover, many of the views and illustrations used to instruct and
-explain machine tools and other devices in other parts of the volume,
-are drawn so that they may be used also as examples in advanced
-instrumental practice. This is a “hint” to the diligent and painstaking
-student worthy of remembering.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 216.--Fig. 217.--Fig. 218.--Fig. 219.]
-
-The designing and drawing of arcs and whole circles occupy a large
-proportion of space in nearly all mechanical drawings. The making of a
-complete circle is a matter of no great difficulty, but the beginning
-and termination of parts of circles require both judgment and
-considerable practice.
-
-To aid the student these two illustrations of circles are introduced. To
-draw fig. 220 with a pencil, using the upper edge of the blade of the
-T-square as a guide, draw a center line, _A B_, mark on it a distance of
-4 inches, space this into half inches, using the dividers and making the
-points with it; then with the pencil compasses or bow pencil, which must
-be held as shown on page 209, and rotated from left to right, or
-clockwise, draw a series of circles through these points, tangent to one
-another or all touching at _A_, care being taken that the pencil lines
-exactly meet at _A_, and also cut the divided points as shown in the
-illustration. For fig. 221 divide the center line as before, and draw
-the semi-circles on it _A B_, _B C_, meeting at _B_, and _C D_, _D E_,
-etc.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 220.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 221.]
-
-Now from center _B_ draw circles _A C_, _C E_, meeting in _C_, and so on
-with the circles, arcs or segments; success in drawing this figure
-depends on the correct spacing of the center line in the first instance
-into equal parts.
-
-The T-square should be used for drawing horizontal lines only. Its head
-should always be placed upon the left edge of the board. Vertical lines
-should be drawn by the use of a triangle placed upon the T-square and
-not by means of the T-square only; because the edges of a board are
-seldom at right angles to each other, and the blade of the T-square is
-often not at right angles to the head, so that lines at right angles to
-each other will not result from the use of the T-square upon all edges
-of the board. Only the upper edge of the T-square should be used, as the
-edges are often not quite straight or parallel.
-
-The 45° triangle has two angles of 45° and one of 90°. The 30° and 60°
-triangle has an angle of 30°, one of 60°, and one of 90°. By placing
-these triangles upon the T-square, lines at any of these angles with a
-vertical or horizontal line may be drawn.
-
-Drawings finished in ink are much more effective and desirable than
-pencil drawings; but as a good inked drawing cannot be made except upon
-an accurate pencil drawing, students should begin with the pencil, and
-should not use ink until they are able to produce satisfactory results
-in pencil.
-
-
-
-
-Projection.
-
-
- The word projection means to throw forward, and in ordinary machine
- drawing it is the projecting or throwing forward of one view from
- another view.
-
- In drawings the lines in one view or plan may be availed of to find
- those of others of the same object, and also to find their shape or
- curvature as they would appear in the other representations; this is
- called projection-drawing.
-
-Fig. 222 is the illustration as shown in fig. 212 on page 143, with the
-addition of dotted projection line, which illustrates the method of
-throwing forward the section and the end view of the object; these two
-views are procured from the plan or first figure, as shown in fig. 222.
-
-Fig. 224 represents the square bolt and nut shown in fig. 216, and the
-mode of projecting is similarly shown by dotted lines.
-
-Fig. 223 shows file handle shown in fig. 215 and the mode of projecting.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 222.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 223.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 224.]
-
-The principles upon which “projection” in drawing is based, are
-illustrated in the following examples and text: As a real object can be
-scaled with a foot rule, so a drawing must permit of scaling and
-measuring. This measuring may take place as with the real object in full
-size or the drawing may, for the sake of convenience, be reproduced and
-measured in a reduced scale, as half, or in still smaller sizes.
-Sometimes it may prove convenient to enlarge the drawing to twice the
-natural size of the object, as a means of making it stand out more
-clearly than the real size would accomplish.
-
-For practical purposes, it is productive of economy of time to mark the
-dimensions of height and width or depth on the drawing in figures, to
-avoid the scaling. This marking of the dimensions is best done at the
-time of making the drawing, while the conception of the object is clear.
-
-To convey a correct impression of the object, all lines that are marked
-to be of equal length should appear equally long on the drawing and be
-capable of being scaled to such equal length; for this, it must be
-assumed that the eye of the observer is equally distant from all points
-of a plane through the nearest point, or one of the axes of the object,
-and that the lines of sight are all parallel to each other and square to
-this plane.
-
-In fig. 225 these lines of sight are seen as directed toward one side of
-a cube or block; it will be readily understood, however, that in this
-way nothing is visible and accessible for scaling and dimensioning
-except this front face of the block, thus, a determination of the
-dimensions of only height and width would be possible, while the
-dimension of depth is entirely undetermined.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 225.]
-
-It is thus necessary to get a view of the block from another side; the
-direction in which it will be most instructive to obtain additional
-views is in the direction of the breadth and of the length and square to
-the lines of sight of the first view.
-
-Fig. 226 shows how the lines of sight would strike the object in the
-three directions. If these lines should be rays of light, some of them
-would pass by the body until they squarely strike the large plane
-surfaces, _I_, _II_, _III_; naturally the rays of light on the faces of
-the object will be retained, and cannot strike the plane surfaces, thus
-leaving dark shadows of exactly the same outlines as the block; these
-would be exact drawings of the faces, and if by some means they can be
-fixed and retained on the plane they can be completely measured and
-dimensioned.
-
-This throwing forward of the outline of the object in different views on
-the planes is called projection of the object, and furnishes a highly
-important means of fixing the outlines and dimensions in the three main
-directions of height, width and depth; evidently, the light rays passing
-by the front face may not all reach the plane of projection, but they
-may be retained by protruding parts of the object behind the front face.
-These protruding parts naturally would also be projected on the plane in
-the same manner as the main body of the block.
-
-These projections of the protruding part are plainly visible in plane
-_II_ and plane _III_, while the part would not be drawn in outline in
-plane _I_. It may be imagined, however, that the greater thickness of
-the body in the direction of the protruding part would intensify also
-the shadow, thus outlining the face of the protruding part in plane _I_.
-
-It is apparent that these three projections are all needed, but as
-drawing is all done in one single plane, the three projections will for
-the sake of convenience have to be brought into a single plane. This can
-be realized if plane _II_ is swung around axis _O Z_ and plane _III_
-around axis _O Y_, until all three surfaces are in one single plane,
-which would then appear as shown in fig. 227.
-
-It is also possible to assume transparent planes in front of the body
-and extend the parallel lines of sight forward instead of backward. Thus
-an outline picture will be created on each of the three planes _I_,
-_II_, _III_ in fig. 228, in a manner similar to fig. 226. For drawing
-purposes, all three views again have to be brought into a single plane,
-which is done by swinging _II_ around _O Z_, and _III_ around _O Y_ in
-the same manner as fig. 227 was evolved from fig. 226.
-
-It will be noted that in fig. 229 plane _III_ is now above _I_ and plane
-_II_ on the left-hand side of _I_, while in fig. 227 they were below and
-at the right-hand side of plane _I_. As the swinging of the top and side
-planes takes place around the edges of the front plane _I_ two systems
-may thus be distinguished, according to the position of plane _I_ in
-regard to the object. Fig. 226 thus represents the system of backward
-projection, while fig. 228 represents the system of forward projection.
-
-Either system can have, however, the plane _II_ at the right- or
-left-hand side edge, while plane _III_ may be attached to the top or
-bottom edge of plane _I_; it is readily understood that a number of
-combinations are possible for each system, as it is not necessary to
-adhere absolutely to one rule. The system of forward projection is the
-one generally practiced and further examples are all executed by this
-system, meaning that the planes are always between the observer and the
-object.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 226.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 227.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 228.]
-
-For the clearness of the drawing, it is desirable to have all corners,
-edges and outlines appear in such solid lines as they appear to the eye.
-If, therefore, certain sharply defined outlines occur on one side more
-than on the opposite one, it is most desirable to take the view against
-the side that has the most definitely marked outlines.
-
-If the opposite side should show a number of wholly different features,
-it may prove even desirable to show this side also, thus gaining four
-views instead of the usual three, and so obtain a more complete
-understanding of the shape of the object, besides giving increased
-facilities for dimensioning each part of the body.
-
-This additional view may be taken from the sides, as well as up or down,
-thus making a maximum of five views possible by which the outside of the
-object may be delineated.
-
-Fig. 230 shows why it may be desirable to take five views of a block
-that has a receding space of different outlines in each of the side and
-top and bottom faces.
-
-It is not necessary, however, to resort to five views in such a case as
-is represented in fig. 230, as the only differing feature, the circular
-space in _III_ bottom, might be shown in _III_ top by dotted lines, and
-the difference of _II_ right might be shown in _II_ left, also by dotted
-lines. It is desirable to show four or five views only where great
-complication and consequent lack of clearness through numerous dotted
-lines would result from having a less number of views.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 229.]
-
-So far the projections and views have only represented the outlines of
-the object; it may often be desirable, however, to show central holes or
-other perforations or variations of sections; in this case it is
-possible to imagine the object cut in slices, by planes, through certain
-well defined axes, or other lines of distinctive importance, and then
-take a view of this sectional plane with its newly created intersections
-or sharply marked outlines; thus, a section may often take the place of
-the third, fourth or fifth view to great advantage.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 230.]
-
-It is not always possible to get a view against a face or side of the
-object, but, with irregularly shaped bodies or under special conditions,
-it may be necessary to take a view of corners, sloping planes, curved or
-irregularly shaped surfaces.
-
-Fig. 231 shows a hexagonal nut in the three normal projections; from the
-top view it is readily seen that the front view shows the side of the
-hexagon in a contracted scale, and that therefore the scaling and
-dimensioning for the horizontal direction have all to be done in the top
-or plan view; the front and side views convey, however, the dimension of
-height correctly, and these are therefore the right places for scaling
-and dimensioning in the vertical direction.
-
-Fig. 231 shows how a cylindrical outline appears in the three views; the
-hole in the nut presents itself as circular in the top view, while it
-appears in the front and side views as a rectangle. For simple objects,
-it is unnecessary to show the edges of the planes, and the three views
-are grouped, as regards distances and positions, as most convenient for
-the execution of the drawing.
-
-Where sloping surfaces are of irregular form, it may be necessary to
-employ help lines for their full determination in the three views. Fig.
-232 shows how the surface that is produced by a slanting cut through a
-cylinder would appear in the three views. The help lines are placed in
-the top view in eight equal divisions around the circumference of the
-cylinder. These division lines are shown by dotted lines on the cylinder
-in the front and side views. Their intersections, with the sloping cut
-in the front view, furnish also the height of the corresponding points
-for the side view.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 231.]
-
-By progressive determination of points, lines and surfaces, even the
-most complicated bodies can be completely represented for their
-reproduction in any application to mechanical or industrial purposes.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 232.]
-
-The spur wheel shown on page 163 is an example of projection drawing.
-
-The wheel is illustrated in three views: fig. 235 is a side view, or
-elevation; fig. 234 is a front elevation; fig. 233 is a section view on
-_C D_. The section is projected from the front elevation by drawing
-parallel lines from the points in front elevation where the lines are
-intersected by the center line _C D_, cutting the plane of view and
-showing the interior shape at _C D_.
-
-The side elevation, fig. 235, is projected from the front elevation,
-fig. 234, by drawing parallel lines from the edges in the front view
-across its face.
-
-In actual drawing practice the figures should be made about three times
-larger than the example, and as follows:
-
-For the front elevation draw the center lines _A B_, _C D_, and from
-their point of intersection as a center, with the compasses draw the
-inner circle or hole, also the pitch line _E E_. With the dividers space
-this line into nineteen equal divisions; each point on this line will be
-the center of a tooth, and the distance from one point to the next one
-is the pitch of the tooth.
-
-Now, with the dividers mark off the thickness of tooth at each side of
-these points on pitch line; with the compasses draw the outer circle for
-points of teeth, the inner circle for the root of teeth, and circles for
-thickness of rim and hub; also circles representing the fillets at rim
-and hub. For clearness and to prevent confusion these lines are shown on
-one-half the wheel only, terminating in center line _C D_; all the lines
-of the front elevation are now complete excepting the teeth.
-
-In the drawing office it is unusual to delineate all the teeth in a gear
-wheel, the lines without the teeth as now completed being deemed
-sufficient, giving all particulars; however, to prevent the error of
-mistaking the circles it is well to represent one or two teeth on the
-drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 233.--Fig. 234.--Fig. 235.]
-
-In the example, proceed and complete the entire wheel, taking on the
-compasses a radius equal to the pitch of the tooth; set them on the
-pitch line at the point _G_, already spaced for thickness of tooth, draw
-line _H_ from pitch line to root of tooth; proceed similarly all around
-the circle, completing one side. Next, reverse the operation and draw
-the corresponding side of the root of tooth. Now take a radius equal to
-half the space between teeth and the thickness of tooth on pitch line,
-and, with center in pitch line, as shown at _I_, draw the outside or
-addendum of tooth, _J_; it will be apparent that the reverse addendum of
-the tooth next adjoining can be formed at the same time, with one
-setting of the compasses; finish all the teeth similarly; the front
-elevation will thus be completed.
-
-Fig. 233 is an excellent example of sectional drawing, to be executed as
-follows:
-
-First draw the center line _L M_ of fig. 233, lay off at each side of it
-half the breadth of face and of the hub; now project, from center line
-_C D_, in the front elevation, fig. 234, with the T-square the upper and
-lower teeth, the fillets, the chamfers, the hub and center hole, also
-dot in the pitch line _F F_, take the radii and draw the fillets and
-chamfers; draw section lines and the view will appear as shown in fig.
-233.
-
-Fig. 235 is a side elevation of fig. 234, and is a fine sample of
-projection, to be executed as follows:
-
-Proceed similarly as for fig. 233, projecting the lines from the outside
-edges of the front elevation, instead of from the center line _C D_ as
-in last figure, and the end elevation will be as shown in fig. 235.
-
-The student will be assisted in understanding this working drawing by
-consulting the pages under the heading of “Gearing.”
-
-
-[Illustration: LETTERING, INKING
-
-SECTION LINING]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 236.]
-
-
-
-
-“Inking In” Drawings.
-
-
-When a drawing is completely finished in penciling, it should next be
-“inked in” for preservation.
-
-Care should be used that the pen may be perfectly clean; the pen should
-be held nearly vertical, leaning just enough to prevent it from catching
-on the paper; the pen should be held between the thumb and first and
-second fingers, the knuckles being bent, so that it may be at right
-angles with the length of the hand.
-
-The ink should be rubbed up fresh whenever it is about to be used, for
-it is better to waste a little time in preparing ink slowly than to be
-at a continual trouble with pens, which will occur if the ink is ground
-too rapidly or on a rough surface.
-
-To test ink, a few lines can be drawn on the margin of a sheet, noting
-the shade, how the ink flows from the pen, and whether the lines are
-sharp. After the lines have dried, cross them with a wet brush; if they
-wash readily, the ink is too soft; if they resist the water for a time
-and then wash tardily, the ink is good.
-
-Care must be exercised not to overload the pen with ink, and, like the
-pencil, the pen should always be moved from left to right and from the
-bottom to the top of the board. When inking, both “nibs” of the pen
-point must rest evenly on the paper and the pen be pressed only lightly
-against the T-square. Never ink any portion of a drawing until the
-penciling is complete.
-
-In inking long, fine lines it is well to go over each line twice,
-without moving the T-square, trying not to widen the line on the second
-passage; also see that the pen contains ink enough to finish a line, as
-it is difficult to continue with the same width of line after
-re-filling.
-
-To produce finished drawings, it is necessary that no portion should be
-erased, otherwise the color applied will be unequal in tone; thus, when
-highly finished mechanical drawings are required, it is usual to draw an
-original and to copy it. Where sufficient time cannot be given to draw
-and copy, a very good way is to take the surface off the paper with fine
-sand-paper before commencing the drawing; if this be done, the color
-will flow equally over any erasure it may be necessary to make
-afterwards.
-
-The rules of procedure in drawing the lines in “inking” are, 1, ink in
-the small circles and curves; 2, ink in the larger circles and curves;
-3, then all the horizontal lines, beginning at the top of the drawing
-and working downward; 4, next ink in all the vertical lines, commencing
-at the left and moving back to the right; 5, draw in the oblique lines;
-6, all the center lines and dimension and reference lines. The figuring
-and lettering should be always done with India ink, thoroughly black;
-the last lines to be drawn are the section lines. The reason why
-irregular curves and arcs of circles are inked in first is, that it is
-easier to draw a straight line up to a curve than to take a curve up to
-a straight line.
-
-In practice, the flat side of the drawing-pen is laid against the
-tee-square or ruler; the taper of the blade of the pen is sufficient to
-throw the point enough away from the edge to prevent blotting; the pen
-is drawn from left to right and from the bottom to the top of the board.
-
-This is shown in fig. 237, intended to represent “short work” with the
-drawing-pen. The wrist is shown resting upon the blade of the square.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 237.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 238.]
-
-In a similar figure, 238, the position of the hand holding the pen
-indicates the best relative posture for inking long lines. In one of
-these illustrations the work is executed principally by the wrist--in
-the other by the arms and fingers working together.
-
-The pen should be held with even pressure against the straight-edge or
-curve. If the pressure varies, the blades will spring and the width of
-the line will change. The blades should be of such length that both will
-bear equally upon the paper when the pen is inclined slightly, so as to
-bring the inner blade near the straight-edge; the angle of the pen
-should not be changed while drawing any line.
-
-When the inking is finished, the whole drawing may be cleaned by rubbing
-it with bread which is not greasy or so fresh as to stick to the paper.
-If the paper is much soiled it may be necessary to use an eraser. A soft
-pencil eraser should be used and great care taken that the ink lines are
-not lightened and broken by it.
-
-To avoid the necessity of using an eraser upon a finished drawing,
-instruments and paper must be kept free from dust and dirt. The
-triangles and T-square should be cleaned often, by rubbing them
-vigorously upon rough, clean paper.
-
-Pounce is a powder used to prevent blotting in rewriting over erasures;
-it is held in a bag or small box with a perforated lid for convenience
-in sprinkling on paper; when used it should be distributed evenly with a
-piece of chamois, and the surplus or loose particles removed before
-applying the ink.
-
-A drawing is made to be read, and the skill in inking, as in “free-hand”
-and in penciling, does not consist so much in the fineness of the lines
-as in their clearness.
-
-
-
-
-Lettering Drawings.
-
-
-Lettering is an important part of making drawings, the object aimed at
-being to identify any portion by reference letter or letters; thus in
-fig. 239 the line _A C_ describes the line extending from
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 239.]
-
-Any information which cannot be expressed in the drawing is always
-expressed by lettering, and it is desirable to confine the lettering of
-drawings to one or two standard alphabets that are plain and distinct,
-and the principles of which are easily acquired. These conditions are
-fulfilled in the Gothic fonts shown on page 173.
-
-Both letters and figures must be carefully made and of uniform
-proportion; it is well to “lay out” these by regular measurement before
-permanently inking them. Letters should not be less than one-eighth of
-an inch in height and penciled carefully before inking.
-
-On page 173 are printed two forms of numerals and letters of the
-alphabet; it is recommended that these be used both for practice in
-free-hand and for regular office work.
-
-For easy reference, letters should not be crowded nor allowed to
-interfere with one another; they should be drawn neatly, avoiding all
-lines of the drawing; plain letters are always used on mechanical
-drawings, whether for title, scale, reference, etc.
-
-Arrow-heads, figures and letters should be in black, and made with a
-writing pen. A pen with a ball point is preferable, giving an equal
-thickness of line, no matter in which direction the stroke is made.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 240.]
-
-Neat, well-lettered drawings go far towards establishing a high standing
-for the aspiring draughtsman. All lettering should be done free-hand,
-first with the pencil, sharpened to a fine round point, and afterwards
-written in ink. For this purpose common writing pens are best to be
-used; fig. 240 represents the several numbers of the approved Gillott’s
-pens adapted to this purpose.
-
-In lettering, it is well, for a guide for size and location, to draw,
-with a round-pointed pencil, two horizontal lines just the height the
-letters are to be; the letters are also best made with careful use of
-the instruments, rather than free-hand.
-
-In order to letter systematically, it is a good plan to start with the
-middle letter of the inscription and work in both directions; making too
-prominent letters should be avoided, plain and distinct letters being
-most desirable.
-
-Finally, with an ordinary writing pen, trace over the penciling in ink;
-the pencil guide lines being erased after the letters are inked in
-completes the operation.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-An important matter in connection with lettering a drawing is the
-location of the letters; these should be so placed as not to interfere
-with the lines of the drawing and should clearly point out the part
-intended to be described. When single letters are used, they should be
-inked in before the shade or section lines are drawn.
-
-Fig. 241 is an example introduced to show the method of lettering a
-descriptive mechanical drawing.
-
-The figure shows a “blow-off valve” of approved design drawn in section;
-the letters designate the several parts; the reading to accompany the
-lettering is as follows:
-
- =A=--Inlet communicating with annular passage (_C_) to admit steam,
- which blows off scale and sediment from seat (_E_) before disc (_L_)
- comes in contact with same.
-
- =B=--Plug to permit passage of rod to clean out blow-off pipe.
-
- =C=--Annular steam passage around casing (_D_) and communicating with
- inlet (_A_).
-
- =D=--Removable bronze casing, in which plug (_L_) fits snugly.
-
- =E=--Removable bronze seat ring, which also holds casing (_D_) in
- place.
-
- =J=--Slot in casing (_D_) arranged to discharge sheet of steam from
- _C_, which, blowing across seat (_E_), cleans off scale and sediment
- before contact with disc (_L_).
-
- =K=--Non-rotating washer to prevent loosening of locknut (_H_) when
- opening valve.
-
- =L=--Reversible disc, having two Babbitt-metal seating faces (_F_)
- (_F_).
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 241.]
-
-
-
-
-Dimensioning Drawings.
-
-
-To “dimension” working drawings is to place measurements upon the parts
-represented, to enable the workman to proceed without measuring the
-drawing itself.
-
-These dimensions should be placed so as not to interfere with nor crowd
-the lines of the drawing, nor yet interfere with one another.
-
-Arrow-heads are used at the extreme points of measurement, the figures
-are generally inserted midway between the arrows; a dot and dash line
-reaches from the figure to the arrow-heads, as shown below.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-When the dimension is short these lines are omitted and the dimension is
-placed outside the drawing, thus
-
-[Illustration]
-
-and connected by a curved line; at other times it is found needful to
-place arrow-heads outside the drawing and the measurement inside.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-When the dimension is long and narrow it is usual to carry the
-dimensions under the drawing by dotted and dash lines, as shown below.
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Arrow-heads and figures should be drawn free-hand with a common writing
-pen.
-
-Usually dimensions are given in inches, up to 24 inches, as it is found
-less confusing; for instance, if written 1′ 1″ it may be mistaken for
-11″; if written 13″ no mistake could be made.
-
-Again, 1′ 0″ may be mistaken for 10″; if written 12″ it would not; in
-addition to being more distinct, it occupies less space on the drawing.
-In large measurements there is more room for the figures, and,
-therefore, they can be spaced further apart--in feet and inches.
-
-All figures should be made of a fairly large size. Vertical dimensions
-should read from the right hand, thus, as shown:
-
-[Illustration]
-
-Measurements of importance, such as the diameter of a circle, the pitch
-or distance apart of rivets and bolts, etc., should be marked in figures
-on the drawing. When rough or unfinished work is mixed with machined or
-finished portions, it is usual to mark F, or “fin.,” after the latter
-dimension.
-
-In practice, at times, instead of dimensions reference letters are used,
-thus:
-
-[Illustration:
-
- D = diam. of shaft, 2¹⁄₂ inches.
- L = length of bearing, 3³⁄₄ inches.
- T = thickness of collar, ⁷⁄₈ inch.
- d = diam. of collar, 3¹⁄₂ inches.]
-
-Generally it is preferable to give the diameters of turned and bored
-work on a section, instead of an end drawn separately; confusion is
-sometimes caused by a number of radial dimensions.
-
-Fig. 242 and fig. 243 are introduced to show the principal measurements
-required in practical work, and the usual way in which such dimensions
-are marked when ordering parts of machinery.
-
-Fig. 242 is a pedestal, or metal frame; three views are shown, the
-center figure being an elevation, the lower figure is the plan of the
-base, the upper figure is a view of the top, on which is bolted the
-bearing block, it being on the outside of the center figure. The
-essential measurements are marked by letters. _H_ is the vertical height
-from base to the seat of bearing block: _L_ being the length, and _W_
-the width of the base; _P_ is the length between checks, and _B_ the
-width of seat for bearing block; _C_ is the distance from center to
-center of the holding down bolt holes, and _T_ is the depth of the holes
-in the base; _K_ is the distance from center to center of the bolt holes
-in the top for bearing block.
-
-Fig. 243 is a hanger, or metal bracket, and shows the center figure or
-elevation, the plan of the top and the plan of the seat for bearing
-block, which is bolted on the interior of the center figure. _H_ is the
-vertical distance from the top to the seat for bearing block; the other
-measurements required are marked by letters similar to figure 242.
-
-Now, one of the important matters in connection with dimensioning a
-drawing is the location of the figures. One rule, whose utility cannot
-be gainsaid, is that they should be so located that they can be altered
-or erased without damage to the lines of the drawing, as changes may be
-necessitated either by original errors in writing down the figures or by
-changes in the design being found desirable during the construction of
-the machine.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 243.--Fig. 244.]
-
-
-
-
-Shading Drawings.
-
-
-To produce an effect, drawings are shaded; that is, shadow lines about
-twice the width of the regular line are drawn according to a recognized
-rule, which always represents the same peculiarity of form in the same
-way.
-
-In working drawings light lines only are permitted; shade lines are
-wider than the working lines, and in reading scale measurements the
-extra thickness of line would make a difference.
-
-Instead of representing the shadow as it is really cast by the object,
-the edges which cast the shadow are determined, and all the views are
-treated as if the light came from behind and from the left, downwards,
-at an angle of 45° to the horizontal line, as shown by the arrows in
-figs. 245 to 248.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 245.--Fig. 246.--Fig. 247.--Fig. 248.]
-
-The lower and right-hand outlines of projecting parts will cast shadows,
-and the student should make them of extra width.
-
-Fig. 249: In shading curves, divide the center line as before (see page
-146) and describe circles from center, _D_; these lines are not to be
-shaded in penciling, but when inking. The figures represent two rings,
-_A_ and _C_, and spaces, _B_ and _D_. The outside of a surface is shaded
-according to circle 1, and the inside surface according to circle 2.
-This will give the desired shading, but it makes a drawing incorrect,
-and therefore shading is not used in working drawings.
-
-This shading is accomplished by inking the circle first with regular
-width of line; then with the same radius remove the point of compasses
-from the _true center_, placing it outside, according to the desired
-position of the shaded line, and describe an arc of a circle.
-
-In fig. 250 divide center line as before; with the 45° triangle or set
-square, draw through the center the diagonals shown by dotted lines; and
-through the points _A_, _B_, _C_, etc., draw the perpendiculars, cutting
-the diagonals; from the points of intersection draw the horizontal
-lines, completing the squares.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 249.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 250.]
-
-Now, take a radius of half an inch, and in the corner of each square
-draw with the bow-pencil a circular arc meeting the pencil lines
-exactly; with the bow-pen _ink in the arcs_ first, then ink carefully
-the lines joining with the arcs; all lines must be of the same width;
-put in the shade on arcs and lines as in fig. 249; and, finally, erase
-the pencil lines at corners, etc.
-
-
-
-
-Section-Lining.
-
-
-Cross-hatching has been defined in the “preliminary definitions” to
-drawing; this term represents the practice of drawing diagonal lines
-representing the interior of an object, shown as a piece cut in half or
-when a piece is broken away. This is done to make more of the parts
-show, or to exhibit more clearly the nature of the materials; hence
-section lining and cross-hatching tell the same thing, _i. e._, the
-drawing of diagonal lines, usually at an angle of 45°, to show that the
-object is broken away and the interior designed to be represented.
-
-[Illustration: Cast iron.
-
-Fig. 251.]
-
-[Illustration: Wrought iron.
-
-Fig. 252.]
-
-[Illustration: Steel.
-
-Fig. 253.]
-
-[Illustration: Composition.
-
-Fig. 254.]
-
-[Illustration: Vulcanite.
-
-Fig. 255.]
-
-[Illustration: Wood.
-
-Fig. 256.]
-
-[Illustration: Leather.
-
-Fig. 257.]
-
-[Illustration: Brick.
-
-Fig. 258.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 259.]
-
-Figs. 251 to 258, inclusive, show the section lining and cross-hatching
-by which it is customary to represent the various materials entering
-into a construction.
-
-In fig. 259 is outlined a representation of a section of a cog-wheel;
-section 1 being the wood cogs; 2, the iron wheel, and 3 the wedges at
-the root of the gear. It would be impossible to convey the same ideas by
-ordinary plan or elevation drawing; all the objects on the same page are
-more clearly represented by the use of section lines or cross-hatching.
-
-Sectioning is executed by drawing a series of parallel lines about ³⁄₃₂
-inches apart. Lay the 45° triangle on the upper edge of the T-square and
-draw the top-most line of the sectioning. Then slide the triangle along
-the T-square for each successive line. The sectioning should be inked in
-without previous penciling and the lines should be finer than the lines
-of the general drawing.
-
-Various devices are in use for mechanically equalizing the distances in
-section lining, but the trained eye is the most practical method. When
-two abutting pieces are sectioned, the section lining on one piece
-slants in an opposite direction to that on the other.
-
-To draw an object to be sectioned on both sides of its center line, only
-one side is sectioned, while the other side is drawn in full.
-
-Sections are necessary in nearly all machine drawings; they are usually
-taken horizontally or vertically, but they may be taken in any
-direction; the position of a section should be shown by a line upon the
-object; this line is called the cutting plane.
-
-In fig. 261 is shown the hub of a wheel, it is also a sample of work for
-practice.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 260.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 261.]
-
-Fig. 260 shows the mode of representing two different materials in one
-plane, or a section may be represented by the darker portion, and the
-lighter shaded portion being a surface resting on the section.
-
-Fig. 261 shows the section of a shaft surrounded by the surface of a
-wheel.
-
-
-TINTS AND COLORS.
-
-For special purposes of illustration drawings are made which must be
-tinted. In such cases the paper must be expanded and stretched evenly
-all over its surface; otherwise when the moist tint is applied the paper
-will wrinkle and get out of shape; to do this cut the paper at least
-half an inch less in size than the drawing board; lay the paper face
-down, turn up a margin or edge of about three-fourths of an inch all
-round, then dampen the paper with a sponge and clean water; allow it to
-soak for a few minutes until it is evenly dampened or moistened all
-over, turn the paper upside down (face up).
-
-Apply strong paste to the under side of the margin all round; rub down,
-on the drawing-board, working from the center of the board outwards so
-as to exclude the air and prevent creases or furrows. The board is then
-inclined and left to dry slowly; make sure that the paper is all well
-pasted and every part of the edges attached to the board.
-
-If tracings are required to be tinted or shaded, the color may be
-applied before the tracing is cut off, or what is more usual, the color
-may be applied on the back of the tracing; then there is no liability to
-wash out the lines.
-
-Mechanical drawings are seldom tinted, but are mainly produced in India
-ink. Where, however, a fine effect is desired, working drawings are
-colored, so as to show at a glance the material of which the different
-parts are to be made.
-
-The colors required are few but should be of the best quality. Besides
-India ink the following water-colors are generally used:
-
-1, Neutral-tint. 2, Prussian Blue. 3, Chrome Yellow. 4, Gamboge. 5, Raw
-Sienna. 6, Carmine. 7, Vermillion. 8, Venetian Red. 9, Sepia. 10,
-Indigo. These come in hard cakes.
-
-Certain colors and tints represent different metals and materials as
-follows:
-
-Wrought Iron--Prussian Blue.
-
-Steel--Carmine and Prussian Blue, mixed to give a purple shade.
-
-Steel Casting--Same as the above darkened by Venetian Red.
-
-Cast-Iron--Neutral Tint made of India Ink, indigo, mixed with a little
-carmine.
-
-Brass--Gamboge or Chrome Yellow.
-
-Babbitt--Emerald Green; sometimes light mixture of India Ink.
-
-Copper--Purple Lake.
-
-It is sometimes found necessary to prepare a highly finished and shaded
-drawing of the work in hand. Such elaborations, in fact, are much
-admired by the uninitiated, although the complete shading of the drawing
-is no criterion as to the scientific value of the machine. An
-illustration of this is told in the note.
-
- NOTE.--A consulting engineer had to lay before a board of directors
- plans of horizontal engines for their consideration. One of these
- drawings was of a very superior machine, but being only depicted
- lineally was at once rejected by them, for a highly finished
- representation of a very inferior apparatus. The engineer, wishing to
- induce the board to decide for the best, suggested that the matter
- should be postponed to a future day, and in the meantime had the
- drawing of the superior machine highly colored and finished. At the
- next meeting the directors unanimously decided that this was the very
- one which they preferred and had chosen.
-
-
-
-
-Reproducing Drawings.
-
-
-When once finished, one or more copies of drawings are frequently
-required; these are produced, 1, by blue printing, as described before;
-2, by tracing. A tracing is a mechanical copy of a design or drawing,
-made by reproducing its lines as seen through a transparent medium--as
-tracing-cloth or tracing-paper.
-
-Tracing-cloth is a thin linen fabric, coated with size; this is called
-_tracing-lines_; _tracing-paper_ is so prepared as to be transparent, so
-that it will receive marks either in pencil or with pen and ink.
-
-Tracing-cloth must be fastened to the board, over the drawing, by pins
-or other tacks; moisture or dampness should be carefully avoided and the
-drawing done on the smooth side of the cloth.
-
-When tracing cloth will not take ink readily a small quantity of pounce
-may be applied to the surface of the cloth and distributed evenly with a
-piece of cotton waste, chamois, or similar material, but the pounce
-should be thoroughly removed--by washing--before applying the ink.
-
-In making tracings the same order is followed as described under the
-section “Inking”--to repeat: 1, ink in the small circles and curves; 2,
-ink in the larger circles and curves; 3, then all the horizontal lines,
-beginning at the top of the drawing and working downward; 4, next ink in
-all the vertical lines, commencing at the left and moving back to the
-right; 5, draw in the oblique lines; 6, all the center lines red
-(carmine), and dimension and reference lines in blue (Prussian blue) or
-_vice versa_. The figuring and lettering should always be done with
-India ink, thoroughly black.
-
-
-BLUE PRINTING.
-
-Copies of drawings or parts representing details and measurements are
-frequently needed for the office, pattern shop, machine and blacksmith
-shop, etc. These copies are best made by printing on sensitized or
-specially prepared paper, from tracings drawn on transparent cloth or
-paper, as hereabove described. The original design may be guarded with
-the utmost care for long preservation, but the blue prints, so called,
-are for ready reference and use without much regard to the length of
-time they are to be in existence.
-
-The usual practice is to carefully trace from the drawing on transparent
-cloth or paper an exact reproduction of it, filling in all detail
-lettering and sizes or figured dimensions.
-
-This tracing is fixed in a frame similar to a picture frame, with the
-side on which the drawing is made next to the glass: 1, place the
-sensitized side of the paper (which has been prepared previously)
-against the back of the tracing; 2, fix soft padding against the back of
-the paper and fasten it up so that both paper and tracing are compressed
-firmly against the glass, permitting no creases or air spaces between
-them.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 262.]
-
-This should be done in a darkened room; 3, expose for three to six
-minutes, according to the intensity of the sun; 4, take the sensitized
-paper out of the frame and quickly wash well in clean running cool
-water, and the drawing will appear in white lines on blue ground; 5,
-hang the print up by one edge so that the water will run off and the
-print will soon dry and be ready for use.
-
-
-TEST-PIECES.
-
-To make good blueprints, being guided only by the appearance of the
-exposed edge of sensitized paper, requires considerable experience. Very
-often, especially on a cloudy day, the edge looks just about right, but
-when taken out of the frame and given a rinsing, it is only to find that
-the print looks pale because it should have been allowed to remain
-exposed for a longer period.
-
-Now simply take a small test-piece of the same paper (say about 4 inches
-square) and a piece of tracing cloth with several lines on its surface
-and lay these small pieces out at the same time the real print is being
-exposed, and cover these samples with a piece of glass about 4 inches
-square. As a general rule, we can find a place on top of the frame for
-the testing-piece, and by having a small dish of water at hand for
-testing the print by tearing off a small bit and washing same to note
-its appearance, the novice can get just as good results as the
-experienced hand without danger of failure.
-
-
-BLACK PROCESS COPYING.
-
-This is accomplished by specially sensitized paper by which a fac-simile
-of the original drawing can be made; that is, black lines upon white
-ground. It also avoids the objection to the blue print paper of shaded
-drawings which show light and shade reversed.
-
-The prints made by the process are said to be absolutely permanent and
-can be altered, added to or colored the same as original drawings.
-
-The sensitized paper is sold ready for use, but it can be prepared by
-dissolving two ounces of citrate of iron and ammonium in eight ounces of
-soft water; keep in a dark bottle, also, one and one-third ounces of red
-prussiate of potash in eight ounces of water; keep in another dark
-bottle; when about to use mix an equal quantity of each in a cup and
-apply in a dark room with a soft brush or sponge to one side of white
-rag paper, similar to envelope paper, let it dry and put away in a dark
-place until required for use.
-
-
-[Illustration: DRAWING OFFICE RULES]
-
-
-
-
-Drawing Office Rules.[1]
-
-
- [1] NOTE.--A. W. Robinson, M.E., Montreal, must have all credit for
- these admirable rules and regulations. They bring into a single focus
- the whole science and art of mechanical drawing.
-
- There are drawing offices where from ten to nearly one hundred people
- are busily employed in making new plans and sketches by the hundreds,
- and where thousands of completed drawings are filed for reference or
- for changes, as these are needed in the shop management.
-
- To be introduced for the first time into such a company is a trial for
- the “new man” both of nerve and manners, and a test as well of skill;
- nothing helps more at such a time than an acquaintance with the rules
- and routine of the office, for the old saying holds good in a drawing
- office, of “doing in Rome as the Romans do.” The author of this book
- has felt this strangeness in a new position and so adds the following
- model-rules for the guidance of the student when first entering a
- regular position in an office where many are employed and where
- success depends upon a systematic ordering of the work in hand.
-
-
-SIZE OF DRAWINGS.
-
-1. The standard size shall be 23 inches by 36 inches, subdivided into
-half, quarter and eighth sheets.
-
-2. Full-size drawings shall be reserved, as far as possible, for general
-views and parts not capable of being shown on smaller sheets.
-
-3. All shop detail shall, as far as possible, be shown on quarter and
-eighth sheets.
-
-
-CHARACTER OF DRAWINGS.
-
-4. Detail drawings shall, as far as possible, classify the different
-kinds of works, such as castings, forgings, shafts, levers, piping, etc.
-Different kinds of work shall not be shown on the same detail drawing.
-
-5. All shop drawings liable to repetition shall be traced and
-blue-printed. All temporary details, requiring only one copy, may be
-made on sketch sheets and press copied.
-
-6. A shop drawing is to be considered as an order or instruction to the
-shop, and not merely as a statement or illustration. For this purpose it
-must convey clearly and distinctly all the information necessary to make
-the article.
-
-7. Every dimension necessary to the execution of the work is to be
-clearly stated by figures on the drawing, so that no measurements need
-to be taken in the shop by scale. All measurements to be given with
-reference to the base or starting point from which the work should be
-laid out, and also with reference to center lines.
-
-8. All figured dimensions on drawings to be plain, round vertical
-figures, not less than one-eighth inch high, and formed by a line of
-uniform width and sufficiently heavy to insure printing well. No thin,
-sloping, or doubtful figures, or diagonal-barred fractions will be
-tolerated. All figured dimensions below two feet to be expressed in
-inches.
-
-9. All center lines to be alternate dot and dash in fine black line. All
-dimension lines to be double dot and dash, with a central space for the
-figure, and of such strength as to show on blue-print more faintly than
-lines of drawing. Lines of drawing to be bold and clearly defined in
-proportion to the scale, and may be shade-lined by making the right-hand
-and bottom lines heavier. No ornamental shading or other “frills”
-allowed on shop drawings.
-
-10. Every drawing, whether whole or half-sheet, shall have the title,
-date, scale and number of the sheet stamped in lower right-hand corner,
-and the quarter and eighth sheets printed on top.
-
-11. The name of the drawing, as given in the title, is invariably to
-consist of two divisions in one line separated by a hyphen. The first
-division is to state the general name of the thing or machine, and the
-second name is to clearly designate the part or parts represented (or if
-a general view should so state). The wording of titles should be
-submitted to the chief engineer or head draughtsman for approval.
-
-12. Each drawing shall bear the name of the draughtsman and examiner,
-the surname being used without initials.
-
-13. Drawings of piping details shall be made in diagram form, using
-standard symbols.
-
-14. All detail parts for standard or repetition work shall be shown
-unassembled as far as possible.
-
-
-DRAWING SYMBOLS.
-
-15. Detail shop drawings should state:
-
-(a) The pattern number of every casting in plain figures of larger size
-than the dimension figures.
-
-(b) The material of which the parts are made, using symbols as follows:
-C.I.--Cast iron. W.I.--Wrought iron. M.S.--Machinery steel.
-H.S.--Hammered steel. Bs.--Brass. Bbt.--Babbitt. Bz.--Bronze.
-C.R.S.--Cold rolled steel.
-
-Other materials write full name.
-
-(c) Finished surfaces will be indicated by “f” written on the line or
-surface to be finished. When not so marked it is understood that the
-part is to be left black or rough. In cases where finish might be
-presumed but not required, follow the figured dimensions by the word
-“cast,” if a casting, and “rough,” if a forging.
-
-
-STANDARDS.
-
-16. The following standards shall be strictly adhered to as given in the
-tables noted:
-
-(1.) Table of standard diameters of shafting and key seats.
-
-(2.) Table of standard stock sizes of rounds.
-
-(3.) Table of standard stock sizes of flat steel.
-
-(4.) Table of standard clearance fits.
-
-(5.) Table of standard symbols for notation of riveting.
-
-(6.) Table of standard symbols for pipe fittings.
-
-Also such other standards as may be adopted from time to time.
-
-
-NUMBERING OF DRAWINGS.
-
-17. Drawers and filing cases shall be numbered consecutively. Drawers
-shall contain 100 sheets each, and filing cases 200 sheets each, and to
-be fully indexed. Drawings shall be numbered by a number indicating both
-drawer number and serial number in the drawer--thus, 7,604 is the fourth
-sheet in drawer 76, etc.
-
-18. Drawing numbers shall be checked off the index as required, and the
-index posted up in uniform handwriting by the clerk.
-
-19. Standard size drawings shall be kept in drawers and quarter and
-eighth sheets in filing cases. All drawings shall be indexed by an index
-sheet kept in each drawer or case.
-
-
-CHECKING.
-
-20. All drawings must be approved before being traced. When tracing is
-completed it will be given immediately to the chief draughtsman, who
-will have a preliminary print made and carefully checked, before being
-used.
-
-
-PATTERNS.
-
-21. All patterns shall bear the number of the drawing on which they are
-first detailed, followed by a serial letter, according to the number of
-patterns on the drawing.
-
-22. Standard patterns used repeatedly and liable to be ordered from in
-repairs must not be changed. Other patterns may only be changed when
-absolutely necessary and by order. When so changed they will bear the
-original number and letter, followed by A for the first change, B for
-the second change, and so on thus: 4860 AB is the second change in
-pattern 4860 A.
-
-
-SKETCH BOOKS.
-
-23. Each draughtsman will be supplied with a sketch book by the company,
-in which he shall make all his notes, calculations and data referring to
-his work, and under no circumstances shall notes of value be made on
-loose sheets. Each entry should invariably be commenced with the subject
-and date, and full notes made of data on which the calculations were
-based, and the results obtained clearly stated. These books are to
-remain the property of the company.
-
-
-IN GENERAL.
-
-24. Changes in drawings, sketches or order lists issued to the shop
-shall only be made when authorized by the chief engineer, or, in his
-absence, by the chief draughtsman, and when so authorized shall be made
-by the order clerk.
-
-25. The names of all similar parts in order lists and drawings are to be
-uniform.
-
-26. Tracings must be kept in safe, for blue-printing purposes only.
-Office copies of blue-prints must be used for references.
-
-27. No drawing, print or photograph shall be taken from office without
-permission.
-
-
-NUMBERING WORKING DRAWINGS.
-
-There are a great many different systems used in indexing drawings, most
-of which have some good points, but very few are sufficiently elastic to
-cover a wide field. A plan based upon the decimal system of notation is
-very simple, and, as there is no practical limit to the number of
-subdivisions, it can be expanded indefinitely. Following are the main
-outline features of the system as adapted to the needs of drawing
-offices belonging to large works.
-
-The main division numbers, 000, 100, 200, 300, etc., are used
-respectively for all plans and general sheets referring to the division
-concerned. 100 includes general plans covering more than one department,
-and all small-scale plans with cross references to departments covered.
-
-The class or tens divisions contain general drawings of the
-subdivisions, the subclasses or units divisions being limited to details
-only. Further subdivisions would probably be necessary in some cases. A
-card index with cross references and written by someone who knew what to
-do is an essential part of the system.
-
-
-[Illustration: GEARING AND DESIGN]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 263.]
-
-
-
-
-Gearing.
-
-
- Under this heading the author has grouped some information relating to
- a subject of wide interest and one sure to interest a student of
- mechanical drawing.
-
- The diagrams are intended for exercises in drawing, _i. e._, to be
- redrawn as parts of practice; the text is to be studied not only for
- the good to be gained from the study of gearing, but as an example of
- the way in which written or printed descriptions are necessary to
- explain a subject illustrated by drawings.
-
-_A gear_ is primarily a toothed wheel; gearing is a train of toothed
-wheels for transmitting motions; there are two chief sorts of toothed
-gearing, viz., spur gearing and bevel gearing.
-
-_A spur wheel_ has teeth around the edge pointing to the center;
-commencing at the center, a spur wheel may be said to consist of a hole,
-square, octagonal or round, for its axle or shaft; a hub; the web, body
-or arms; a rim, and the teeth; see fig. 263.
-
-_A spur wheel_ has teeth on its circumference which run parallel to its
-shaft; wheels as shown in fig. 271 are termed _helical wheels_; these
-are similar to spur wheels except their teeth are arranged upon
-different angles to the shaft.
-
-_A bevel_ is a slant or inclination of a surface from a right line,
-hence a bevel wheel is one whose teeth stand beveling or at an oblique
-angle to the shaft, or towards the center; see fig. 267.
-
-_Miter wheels_ are bevel wheels of the same size, working at right
-angles with one another; see fig. 268.
-
-_The diameter of both spur and bevel wheels_ is measured and calculated
-neither from the outside nor from the bottom of the teeth, but on the
-pitch circle. When we speak of the diameter of a spur or bevel wheel, we
-mean the diameter of the pitch circle, without any reference to the form
-of tooth.
-
-_The addendum circle_ of a toothed wheel is as shown in illustration,
-fig. 264; _addendum_ means “something added,” and, as shown in the
-figure, it is the part added beyond the pitch “line” or circle.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 264.]
-
-_The pitch line_ is the most important one in gearing; the “pitch line”
-or “pitch circle” is supposed to be the working circle. This is shown in
-P--P in fig. 274.
-
-_The periphery_ of a wheel is the extreme circumference, as N in fig.
-274.
-
-All parts of gear-wheels consist of portions, to which have been given
-generally accepted names. Fig. 264 shows the “addendum circle” and the
-“pitch line” as marked. The teeth and rim are shown in white, and the
-other portions are indicated by the names.
-
-_The circular pitch line_, as opposed to the diametral pitch, is the
-same as the pitch circle. It is a line which bisects all the teeth of a
-toothed wheel.
-
-_The rolling circle_ is the same as the circular pitch line.
-
-_Diametral_ means pertaining to a diameter or the length of a diameter;
-hence a diametral pitch is a system of measures or enumeration based
-upon the diameter instead of the circular pitch line; it is used very
-generally in spacing for fine tooth gear. Wheels of this description
-usually have their teeth cut in a gear-cutting machine, _i. e._, medium
-and fine tooth gears.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 265.]
-
-_A cog wheel_ is the general name for any wheel which has a number of
-cogs placed around its circumference.
-
-When the teeth of a wheel are made of the same material and formed of
-the same piece as the body of the wheel, they are called _teeth_; when
-they are made of wood or some other material and fixed to the
-circumference of the wheel, they are called _cogs_; see fig. 265.
-
-_A pinion_ is a small wheel. When two toothed wheels act upon one
-another, the smaller is generally called the pinion. The terms _trundle_
-and _lantern_ are applied to small wheels having cylindrical bars
-instead of teeth. The teeth in pinions are sometimes termed _leaves_; in
-a trundle, _staves_. See fig. 273.
-
-The wheel which acts is called a _leader_ or _driver_; and the wheel
-which is acted upon by the former is called a _follower_ or the
-_driven_. When a screw or _worm_ revolves in the teeth of a wheel, the
-latter is termed a _worm wheel_ or _worm gear_; see fig. 270. When a
-pinion acts with a rack having teeth, we speak of _rack_ and pinion.
-When the teeth are on the inside of the rim, and not on the periphery,
-the wheel is termed an _internal gear_; see fig. 272.
-
-Two wheels acting upon one another in the same plane are called _spur
-gear_; the teeth are parallel with the axis. When wheels act at an
-angle, they are called _bevel gear_.
-
-_Friction gear-wheels_ are those which communicate motion one to the
-other by the simple contact of their surfaces.
-
-In frictional gearing the wheels are toothless and one wheel drives the
-other by means of the friction between the two surfaces which are
-pressed together.
-
-Grooved friction wheels are used to give greater cohesion than can be
-obtained by the plain surface.
-
-Fig. 263 shows a pair of spur-wheels in gear. The dotted circles which
-meet are the rolling circles, called the “pitch line” or “pitch circle.”
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 266.]
-
-A spur mortise wheel is similarly shown in fig. 266; it is very like in
-appearance to a spur wheel; it differs essentially in that the teeth are
-separate cogs, fixed in singly to the rim; see also fig. 265, page 201.
-
- NOTE.--The teeth of spur wheels cast from a pattern must of necessity
- be larger at one side than at the other, because the teeth must have
- taper to permit the extraction of the pattern from the mould;
- therefore, in fixing wheels to gear, the large side of one should meet
- the smaller side of the other; should the two large sides come
- together the teeth will meet only at the large side, and the teeth
- will probably break away from the excessive strain on that point.
-
-_Skew gearing_ are bevel wheels working out of center; the teeth do not
-form radial lines from the wheel center.
-
-Fig. 267 shows a pair of bevel wheels in gear as described on page 199.
-A bevel mortise wheel, _i. e._, one having cogs inserted in its rim
-instead of teeth.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 267.]
-
-A bevel wheel and pinion must be made to suit one another by both having
-teeth forming together an angle of 90°, therefore they are pairs, or
-proportioned in the number of teeth one to the other. Any other
-proportion used would not exactly gear and would be termed a “bastard”
-gear.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 268.]
-
-Fig. 268 represents a pair of miter wheels in gear; it will be noted
-that the shafts, when connected, will be at right angles to each other,
-the wheels being in all particulars of the same dimensions; the figure
-answers the purpose of a much longer description, if given in words.
-
-A miter-wheel can easily be known by putting a square upon the face of
-the teeth, which are always at an angle of 45° with one another,
-irrespective of size.
-
-_A miter-wheel_ is a particular kind of bevel-wheel, the bevel being
-limited to an angle of 45° in each wheel.
-
-The curve of the teeth in bevel-gears, when correctly formed, changes
-constantly from one end of the tooth to the other, therefore bevel-gears
-whose teeth are produced with a forced cutter are not theoretically
-correct.
-
-Fig. 269 represents a rack and pinion: the teeth in this form of gear
-are shaped similarly to those in the spur wheel, shown on page 198, with
-the difference that the teeth of one are on a circle and on the rack are
-made on a straight line.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 269.]
-
-A flange or addition to the end of a tooth and the rim connecting them
-together is used to strengthen the teeth. This extends from the root to
-pitch line when the wheel and pinion are both flanged: if only one is
-flanged it extends from the root to the addendum.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 270.]
-
-Fig. 270 illustrates a worm and a worm wheel, sometimes called screw
-gears. This is a slow but powerful method of transmitting power, one
-revolution of the worm only moving the wheel the distance of one tooth
-and space.
-
-_A worm gear_ is a spur wheel with teeth at an angle to the axis, so as
-to work with a worm which is a _screw_, or has teeth shaped in the form
-of a spiral wound round its circumference; the screw or worm is called
-an endless screw, because it never comes to a stopping place in the
-circumference of the wheel.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 271.]
-
-Fig. 271 represents a gear with helical teeth. It is similar to a spur
-wheel, and is used in place of same in heavy and slow moving machinery,
-the formation of teeth preventing--in large measure--the jar or
-concussion noticeable in common spur gears.
-
-In recent years the speed at which gearing is run has been greatly
-increased. A striking instance is that of a pair of _cast-iron_ helical
-wheels, 6 ft. 3 in. diameter, 12 in. wide, making 220 revolutions per
-minute, the speed of the pitch line being 4,319 feet per minute; these
-wheels are running continuously and with little noise. There is also a
-_cut_ gear in a mill in Massachusetts, 30 feet in diameter, and the
-speed of pitch line is 4,670 feet per minute.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 272.]
-
-_An internal or annular gear wheel_ is one in which the faces of the
-teeth are within and the flank without the pitch circle, hence the
-pinion operates within the wheel. See fig. 272.
-
-In internal geared wheels there is almost an entire absence of friction
-and consequent wear of the teeth, as compared to ordinary spur gearing.
-
-Fig. 273 shows a _crown-wheel_ which has pin teeth which are fixed by
-one end only, on its side face and gear into a trundle wheel.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 273.]
-
-_A trundle wheel_ has no teeth, properly speaking. Instead of teeth, it
-has pins as shown on illustration, fig. 273, arranged like the rungs of
-a ladder between two walls. See page 201.
-
-_Trains of Gears._--When two wheels mesh--that is, engage with each
-other--as in fig. 263, one axle revolves in the opposite direction to
-the other; but when internal gears mesh as shown in fig. 272, the shafts
-revolve in the same direction; three or more gears running together are
-often called _a train of gears_.
-
-Maximum speed of gears under favorable conditions for safety is
-comparatively--
-
- Ordinary cast-iron wheels, 1,800 feet per minute.
- Helical cast-iron wheels, 2,400 feet per minute.
- Mortise wood cog wheels, 2,400 feet per minute.
- Ordinary cast-steel wheels, 2,600 feet per minute.
- Helical cast-steel wheels, 3,000 feet per minute.
- Cast-iron machine cut wheels, 3,000 feet per minute.
-
-It is not, however, advisable to run gears at their maximum speeds, as
-great noise and vibration are caused.
-
-
-
-
-Designing Gears.
-
-
- This section is introduced into the work for a double purpose; 1, as
- an exercise in drawing; 2, as a study in accurate measurements. It is
- a sample of the work that the advanced student in mechanical drawing
- will be confronted with as he puts in practice the theory of the art
- of drawing.
-
- Some sample rules are given in the following pages to aid in
- calculations relating to gears, and still others are given under the
- section “Useful Rules and Tables” at the end of the volume; these are
- to be carefully studied.
-
-To accurately divide the pitch circle of a gear wheel by hand requires
-both patience and skill. On the accuracy of spacing lies the essential
-requisite of a good gear wheel.
-
-The drawing in plate, fig. 274, illustrates a pair of spur wheels, shown
-in gear, the office instructions for which being:
-
-“Required, _a detail plan_ of a pair of spur wheels; dimensions: wheel,
-76 teeth, 3¹⁄₂ inches pitch, 7-inch eye, 6 arms; pinion, 19 teeth;
-scale, 1¹⁄₂ inches = 1 foot.”
-
-The drawing, as illustrated, is the result of the above instructions,
-all pencil lines being removed, and this result is worked out as
-follows:
-
-76 teeth × 3¹⁄₂ inches, pitch = 266 inches in circum. = 7 ft. 0¹¹⁄₁₆ in.
-diam. = 3 ft. 6¹¹⁄₃₂ in. radius; with this measurement as represented on
-scale, draw line _P P_ on drawing. This is called the pitch line.
-
-Draw next diameter line, produce or extend this diameter line for
-pinion, and with radius of 10¹⁹⁄₃₂ (19 teeth × 3¹⁄₂) from pitch line of
-wheel, draw pitch line of pinion.
-
-Take any point in this pitch line of wheel, mark off 3¹⁄₂ inches as
-represented on scale, mark this around the pitch line, it will be the
-center of each of the 76 teeth; then the breadth of thickness of each
-tooth (= pitch × 0.475) must be marked from these centers, then mark
-from _P L_, length of tooth to point (= pitch × 0.35) and _P L_ to root
-(= pitch × 0.4), draw circles for outside of teeth _N_ and root of tooth
-_O_; now with compass set to the pitch (3¹⁄₂) of the wheel, draw the
-outer portion from pitch line of tooth.
-
-The radius will center in the pitch line of next tooth where thickness
-of tooth has been marked; after finishing outer portion of both sides of
-teeth, set the compass from _center_ of tooth with radius to the
-thickness marked on pitch line and draw the portion of tooth from pitch
-line to root.
-
-Now mark off with dividers and draw thickness of rim (= pitch × 0.5),
-divide this line into six parts, draw radii for centers of arms; draw
-the bore hole 7″ and the thickness of metal for hub same as pitch.
-
-On radii lines of arms, draw the breadth of arm at rim (= pitch and
-thickness of tooth), increase in breadth approaching the center (1″ per
-foot), draw the thickness of feather of arm (= pitch × 0.35); draw web
-on inside of rim (= pitch × 0.375); fill in arcs for the joining of arms
-in rim and hub (radii = pitch × 0.8) and feather to rim and hub (radii =
-pitch × 0.37).
-
-Proceed in similar manner, completing the teeth of pinion, and when
-pencil lines are all in, ink the drawing, erasing all needless lines.
-
-_P P_ shows the pitch line; _B_, thickness of tooth; _c_, breadth of
-space; _A_, the pitch; _E_, clearance at root; _N_, the addendum of
-tooth; _O_, the root of tooth; _H_, length of tooth from pitch line to
-point; _I_, length of tooth pitch line to root; _G_, whole length of
-tooth; _F_, thickness of rim; _J_, web or feather on rim; _K_, breadth
-of arm; _L_, thickness of feather; _M_, hub, or thickness round the eye.
-
- NOTE.--It must be remembered that no fixed standard has ever been
- agreed upon for these proportions, and workshops differ considerably
- in practice.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 274.]
-
-The number of teeth, their proportions, pitch and diameter of pitch
-circle are frequently determined on the “Manchester” principle. This
-system originated in Manchester (Eng.), and is now generally used in the
-United States for determining diameters and number of teeth, which, of
-course, regulate speeds. The principle is not applicable to large
-wheels, but is limited in its application to small wheels, or wheels
-having “fine pitch,” as will be seen in the following explanation, which
-is introduced as very useful and indispensable knowledge for the
-acquisition of the student in mechanical drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 275.]
-
-The “pitch” of teeth has already been stated to be the distance from
-center of one tooth to the center of another on the “pitch line,”
-measured on the chord of the arc. In determining the number of teeth or
-pitch of wheels on this principle, the pitch is reckoned on the
-_diameter_ of the wheel, _in place of the circumference_, and
-distinguished as wheels of “4 pitch,” “6 pitch,” “8 pitch,” etc. In
-other words, this means that there are four, six, or eight teeth in the
-circumference of the wheel for every inch of diameter.
-
-In designing gears to transmit power the stress on a tooth is
-calculated; it determines the breadth or width and also the thickness of
-the tooth on pitch line; the space between the teeth is in proportion to
-the thickness of tooth, and the thickness of both combined (one tooth
-and one space), measured on the pitch line or circle, is the pitch of
-the wheel.
-
-From the pitch all the proportions and measurements for the sizes and
-strength of the parts of the wheel are taken _by rule_, and a
-symmetrical form is produced.
-
-In machine drawing the practice is to represent wheels by circles only;
-the teeth are never shown except on enlarged details and then only in
-very rare instances; the circles drawn are always the _pitch lines_ or
-the rolling points of contact of the wheels.
-
-The addendum circle is seldom if ever used in practical drawing. Should
-it be necessary to show it in an exceptional case, the circle would be
-represented by “dotted” line.
-
-The shape of tooth and mode of constructing it, as practiced in drawing
-offices, differs from the true theoretical curve of the tooth, although
-very minutely.
-
-In all calculations for the speed of toothed gears the estimates are
-based upon the pitch line, the latter standing in the same place as the
-circumference of a pulley.
-
-To find the _diameter of a gear-wheel_ multiply the number of teeth by
-the pitch, divide by 3.1416.
-
-To find the _pitch of a gear-wheel_ multiply the diameter by 3.1416 and
-divide by the number of teeth.
-
-To find the _number of teeth in a gear-wheel_ multiply the diameter by
-3.1416 and divide by the pitch.
-
-The _breadth of wheels_, where practicable, should be at least three
-times the pitch.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 276.]
-
-Fig. 276 shows a scale for proportions of teeth; it is divided into
-tenths and used thus:
-
-Say wheel is 2″ pitch, then from pitch circle to addendum will be 3¹⁄₂
-tenths, and from pitch circle to root of tooth will be 4 tenths measured
-at the 2″ line on scale, and so on.
-
-The decimal proportions already given in example, page 210, are adopted
-in many workshops. Many others use the proportions approved of by Sir
-William Fairbairn, which are:
-
-Table of proportion of gears:
-
- Depth of tooth above pitch line .35 of the pitch.
- Depth of tooth below pitch line .40 of the pitch.
- Working depth of tooth .70 of the pitch.
- Total depth of tooth .75 of the pitch.
- Clearance at root .05 of the pitch.
- Thickness of tooth .45 of the pitch.
- Width of space .55 of the pitch.
-
-The diameter of a wheel or pinion is invariably the diameter measured on
-pitch circle, except it is specially described otherwise, thus the
-diameter “over all,” etc.
-
-The shape of the curved face of the teeth of gears extending from the
-root to the addendum is the curve conforming to the passage of the teeth
-described on its fellow entering and leaving, as they rotate or roll
-together on their pitch circles.
-
-The curve of teeth outside the pitch circle is called “the face,” and
-the curve from pitch circle to root is called “the flank.”
-
-The difference between the width of a space and the thickness of a tooth
-is called clearance or side clearance.
-
-The play or movement permitted by clearance is called the backlash;
-clearance is necessary to prevent the teeth of one wheel becoming locked
-in the spaces of the other.
-
-Wheels are in gear or geared together when their pitch lines engage, _i.
-e._, when the pitch circles meet.
-
-Wheels to be geared together must have their teeth spaced the same
-distance apart, or in other words, of the same pitch.
-
-The teeth of spur wheels are arranged on its periphery parallel to the
-wheel axis, or shaft on which it is hung.
-
-The teeth of a bevel wheel or bevel gears are always arranged at an
-angle to the shaft.
-
-When the _teeth_ of bevel gears form an angle of 45° they are called
-miter wheels.
-
-Miter wheels to gear must be of equal sizes.
-
-A crown wheel is a disc that has teeth which are on its side face; that
-is, teeth on a flat circular surface all parallel to the axis of the
-wheel.
-
-A rack has teeth on a flat surface or plane all parallel to one another.
-
-A gear cut by machine is called a _cut gear_. It has teeth with less
-clearance than cast wheels, which are not so true or perfect, and
-therefore require more clearance.
-
-A worm with even a light load is liable to heat and cut if run at over
-300 feet of rubbing surface travel. The wheel teeth will keep cool, as
-they form part of a large radiating surface; the worm itself is so small
-that its heat is dissipated slowly.
-
-A worm throws a severe end thrust or strain on its shaft.
-
-_Steel Gears._--There is great economy in the use of cast-steel over
-cast-iron in gears; the average life of the former is nearly twice as
-great as of cast-iron gears. And, apart from their longer life and
-efficiency, there is less danger of breaking.
-
-The most accurate teeth, strongest and most uniform in wearing, are to
-be found in steel gears cut from solid stock, or made by cutters of
-proper shape.
-
-Fig. 275 shows an elevation and a vertical section of a spur wheel. From
-these views the various parts in spur gears can be better understood, as
-they are represented here in combination, and the wheel in its entirety.
-
-_AA_ is the horizontal center line, _BB_, _BB_ the vertical center
-lines, _II_ and _II_ the pitch lines, _N_ thickness of tooth, _O_ space
-of tooth, _D_ total depth of tooth, _C_ breadth of face, _F_ diameter on
-pitch line, _P_ diameter over all, _G_ diameter of hub, _E_ diameter of
-hole, _H_ depth of hole, _L_ thickness of rim, _M_ thickness of web.
-
-Much has been and still is being written on gearing. No general rule is
-followed by the writers; the elementary principles given will enable the
-student to master spur gearing, and bevel and combinations of many kinds
-of wheels will afterwards be found easier to delineate than the numerous
-lines seem to indicate.
-
-
-[Illustration: WORKING DRAWINGS]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 277.]
-
-
-
-
-Working Drawings.
-
-
- From the “plans” made in the office are produced “working
- drawings”--which represent in detail the work to be done to exact
- measurement and of material, as indicated, by the pattern-maker, the
- foundry, the forge, the shop, and finally, by the erector of the
- completed mechanism.
-
- How to satisfactorily fulfill the directions contained in these
- drawings, representing only a part of the work, so that it will fit,
- with needed accuracy, to all other parts of the design, is the task
- before each separate worker.
-
-It is by means of this division of the process of manufacture through
-these drawings, that scores and hundreds of men can be employed at the
-same time upon a single engine or machine; thus, while handwork has been
-superseded by machines in many quarters, the art of drawing has not been
-narrowed nor diminished, for no drawings or designs have yet been made
-by machinery, nor are they likely to be.
-
-It is thus that a good designer and draughtsman “projects” or extends
-himself, to the advantage of many fellow workers.
-
-The drawing, fig. 277, shows a simple form of pillar crane: it consists
-of an upright cast-iron pillar, which is bolted on a cap stone, under
-which is the foundation plate not shown in the drawing; the boom is of
-rolled steel, supported by steel tie rods, and provided with rollers at
-the base; the hoisting gear is shown in broken lines and circles; all as
-seen in the drawing.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 278.--Fig. 279.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 280.]
-
-Figs. 278, 279 and 280 show a drawing of a “hydraulic beam bending
-machine” in three views; fig. 280 is a plan, fig. 278 is an end
-elevation, and fig. 279 a side elevation, and a portion of the latter in
-section shows the interior construction.
-
- NOTE.--These three views are a practical illustration of drawings for
- a machine of the following dimensions: this machine has a bed 3 × 5
- feet in area, with 27 holes in each side for the bending pins. The
- frame and cylinders are made of cast iron, the rams of machinery
- steel, and the slides for holding the bending blocks, of steel
- casting. The distance between the bending blocks is 17 inches. The
- cylinders are copper lined, 8 inches diameter, and the rams have a
- 6-inch stroke. The rams, which are independent and single acting, are
- returned by counterweights placed as shown under the table. The
- cylinders can be operated independently from either side of the
- machine by an arrangement of valves and levers. The machine complete
- weighs about 7,500 lbs.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 281.--Fig. 282.--Fig. 283.]
-
-The drawing, page 222, shows three views of a power punching press.
-
-Fig. 282 is a side elevation.
-
-Fig. 283 a front elevation.
-
-Fig. 281 a vertical sectional view; from these views the proportion,
-general arrangement and disposition of the automatic devices can be
-easily understood; it may be well to call particular attention to the
-automatic clutch on the top shaft and the tripping device.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 284.]
-
-This drawing, fig. 284, shows a side elevation in section of a
-self-adjusting piston-rod packing.
-
-_A_ is the gland, _B_ is the piston rod, _C_ is a brass sleeve which
-contains the packing _D_, _E_ is the cylinder cover, _F_ is a coil
-spring. It will be seen that the spring _F_ abuts on a bushing in the
-bottom of the stuffing box and is prevented from scoring the piston rod
-by stepping over the ends of the bushing and follower. All as shown in
-the drawing.
-
-The drawing, fig. 285, shows a sectional view of a large pulley fixed on
-a “quill,” or hollow shaft: the driving shaft passes through the hollow
-shaft and is attached to the friction clutch shown at the right-hand
-end; this friction clutch drives the hollow shaft and pulley.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 285.]
-
- Fig. 286 shows the mechanism, called the link-motion, employed to
- reverse an engine, or to enable it to be run in either direction. Many
- forms of link-motion have been devised, but the Stephenson form, as
- shown in the figure, is, however, the one in almost universal use.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 286.
-
-This drawing shows shading and the mode of figuring the parts for
-identification.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 287.--Fig. 288.--Fig. 289.]
-
-Figs. 287 to 289 represent a bumping-post for the end of railway tracks,
-reproduced on an enlarged scale from the columns of the _Engineering
-News_.
-
-In addition to the lettering and dimensions, admirably shown in the
-drawings, the following description is appended to show how printed text
-and mechanical drawings mutually aid in practical--or commercial--usage.
-
-The unique feature of the arrangement shown, is that the center line of
-the post does not coincide with the track, thus adapting itself to the
-nature of the blows of a car-bumper, as received in the single-post
-style of the mechanism.
-
-
-BUMPING POST FOR RAILWAY TRACKS.
-
-The post is a 15-in. steel I-beam, resting on a base plate ³⁄₄-in.
-thick, and supported by anchor rods 1³⁄₄ ins. diameter, with upset ends
-held by nuts on a heavy forging bolted to the top of the post. These
-rods extend forward and outward to clear the rails, and then pass
-vertically through a 4 × 6-in. angle iron crosstie, and an ordinary
-wooden tie, extending down to an anchor block or deadman buried in the
-ground 6¹⁄₂ ft. below the top of the rail.
-
-Vertical braces or spreaders are fitted between the anchor timber and a
-longitudinal timber under the ties, so as to prevent the loosening of
-the anchor rods when the post is struck. The rods are held in position
-against the rails by steel forgings bolted to the rail with 1-in. turned
-bolts. An oak striking block, 12 × 12 ins., 3 ft. long, is bolted
-between angle iron brackets on the face of the post.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 290.
-
-Front View.
-
-Fig. 291.
-
-Side View.
-
-Scale, 3 in. = 1 ft.]
-
-
-
-
-To Read Working Drawings.
-
-
- One of the advantages resulting from a knowledge of practical
- draughting is, that it enables a mechanic to _read_ a drawing when
- given him as a guide for his work. It is getting every day more
- general among draughtsmen to figure exactly and minutely every part of
- their drawings which are made to a scale.
-
-Drawings are almost always made “finished size,” that is, the dimensions
-are for the work when it is completed. Consequently all the figures
-written on the different parts indicate the exact size of the work when
-finished, without any regard to the size of the drawing itself, which
-may be made to any reduced and convenient scale.
-
-Even in full size drawings this system of figuring is not objectionable.
-It is a system which should be followed whenever a drawing is made “to
-work to,” for it allows the workman to comprehend at a glance the size
-of his work and the pieces he has to get made. Figuring makes a drawing
-comprehensible even to those who cannot make drawings.
-
-A working drawing should be made, primarily, as plain as possible by the
-draughtsman; second, the workman should patiently and carefully study
-it, so that it is thoroughly understood.
-
-In studying a drawing, the object it is intended to represent should be
-made as familiar as possible to the mind of the student, so that he may
-fill out in imagination the parts designedly left incomplete--as in a
-gear wheel where only two or three teeth are drawn in, that he may see,
-mentally, the whole.
-
-The following is a description of reading drawings when dimensions are
-not figured. Here we have a piece of machinery represented by fig. 290,
-and the information we have is that it is to scale, three inches = one
-foot. Now, with scale and dividers, we can arrive at its actual
-dimensions.
-
-Measurements should be first taken _with the dividers from the drawing_,
-and then the dividers applied to the scale to which the drawing is made;
-this scale is always marked on the working drawing; if the dividers are
-set to the length of the base of the example, fig. 290, they will
-measure, on an ordinary two-foot rule, three and three-fourths inches,
-_but if applied to the three-inch scale they will read_ one foot three
-inches, the actual length of the part; the “reading” is from the scale;
-thus, in both figures the drawings are “three-inch scale.”
-
-Now, 3 inches is one-fourth of a foot, hence 3³⁄₄ × 4 = 1 ft. 3 in., the
-full size, and so on for all parts of the drawing.
-
-Fig. 291 shows _a side view_ of the “steady rest,” illustrated in front
-elevation, fig. 290; from the scale as before we get the sizes; the two
-views combined give length, breadth and thickness of the parts.
-
-In some figures it is necessary to show end views, also section views,
-to enable all measurements to be read from the drawing.
-
-
-[Illustration: PATENT OFFICE DRAWINGS]
-
-
-
-
-Patent Office Drawing Rules.
-
-
-U. S. PATENT OFFICE RULES.
-
-AS APPLIED TO PREPARATION OF DRAWINGS.
-
-Each applicant for a patent is required by law to furnish a drawing of
-his invention whenever the nature of the case admits of it. The drawing
-must be signed by the inventor or the name of the inventor may be signed
-on the drawing by his attorney-in-fact, and in either case must be
-attested by two witnesses. The drawing must show every feature of the
-invention covered by the claims.
-
-When the invention consists of an improvement on an old machine, the
-drawing must exhibit, in one or more views, the invention proper,
-disconnected from the old structure, and also, in another view, so much
-only of the old structure as will clearly show the connection of the
-invention with the old machine.
-
-Several editions of the patent-drawings are printed, the smallest of
-which is about 3 × 4³⁄₄ inches, so that the drawing must be so made that
-it will stand a reduction of about one-fourth. This work is done by the
-photo-lithographic process, and therefore the character of the original
-drawing must be brought as nearly as possible to a uniform standard of
-excellence suited to the requirements of the process.
-
- NOTE.--These rules will be found most useful to many readers of this
- work--hence their introduction at this point. Nearly 50,000 patents
- are “applied for” in the United States every year.
-
-The following rules are given by the Patent Office for guidance:
-
-1. Drawings must be made upon pure white paper of a thickness
-corresponding to three-sheet Bristol board. The surface of the paper
-must be calendered and smooth. India ink alone must be used, so as to
-secure perfectly black and solid lines.
-
-2. The size of a sheet on which a drawing is made must be exactly 10 ×
-15 inches. One inch from its edges a single marginal line is to be
-drawn, leaving the “sight” precisely 8 × 13 inches. Within this margin
-all work and signatures must be included. One of the shorter sides of
-the sheet is regarded as its top, and measuring downwardly from the
-marginal line, a space of not less than 1¹⁄₄ inches is to be left blank
-for the heading of title, name, number and date.
-
-3. All drawings must be made with the pen only. Every line and letter,
-signature included, must be absolutely black. This direction applies to
-all lines, however fine, to shading, and to lines representing cut
-surfaces in sectional views. All lines must be clean, sharp, and solid,
-and they must not be too fine or crowded. Surface shading, when used,
-should be open. Sectional shading should be made by oblique parallel
-lines about ¹⁄₂₀ of an inch apart. Solid black should not be used for
-sectional or surface shading.
-
-4. Drawing must be made of the fewest lines possible, consistent with
-cleanness. The plane upon which a sectional view is taken should be
-indicated by a broken or dotted line. Heavy lines on the shade side of
-objects should be used, except where they tend to thicken the work and
-obscure letters of reference. The light is always supposed to come from
-the upper left hand corner at an angle of 45 degrees.
-
-5. The scale to which a drawing is made should be large enough to show
-the mechanism without crowding. The number of sheets used must never be
-more than is absolutely necessary.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 292.]
-
-6. The different views should be consecutively numbered. Letters and
-figures of reference must be carefully formed. They should, if possible,
-measure at least one-eighth of an inch in height.
-
-If the same part of an invention appears in more than one view of the
-drawing it must always be represented by the same character.
-
-7. The signature of the inventor is to be placed in the lower right-hand
-corner of each sheet, and those of the witnesses at the lower left-hand
-corner.
-
-The title should be written with pencil on the back of the sheet.
-
-Drawings should be rolled for transmission, never folded.
-
-On page 235, fig. 292 exhibits a reproduction of a patent office
-drawing, used in connection with specification papers in an application
-for a United States patent.
-
-
-ENGLISH PRACTICE.
-
-The rules for patent drawings in England are practically the same as in
-the United States; the paper sizes are, however, different. They must be
-on sheets of one of the two following sizes (the smaller being
-preferable), 13 inches at the sides by 8 inches at the top and bottom,
-or 13 inches at the sides by 16 inches at the top and bottom, including
-margin, which must be one-half an inch wide.
-
-If there are more figures than can be shown on one of the smaller-sized
-sheets, two or more of these sheets should be used in preference to
-employing the large size. When an exceptionally large drawing is
-required, it should be “_continued_” on subsequent sheets. There is no
-limit to the number of sheets that may be sent in.
-
-
-[Illustration: PRACTICAL POINTS]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 293. See page 244.]
-
-
-
-
-Useful Hints and “Points.”
-
-
- Many of these “points” are repetitions, with but little variation from
- the way they have been previously stated; they are thus repeated to
- emphasize their practical worth.
-
-A good draughtsman leaves his work in such a state that any competent
-person can without difficulty ink in what he has drawn.
-
-The criterion of a good set of drawings is that with a properly prepared
-specification they are complete in themselves and require no
-explanation.
-
-A “break” in a figure or object in a drawing is shown in rough irregular
-lines, as in fig. 134, on page 131; this is useful when the paper is not
-large enough to show the whole.
-
-Never use a sloping line in writing fractions on a drawing. The
-objection arises from the fact that such a dimension as 1³⁄₁₆, if
-written with the inclined line, unless very distinctly executed, may be
-read as ¹³⁄₁₆.
-
-In inking do not draw the lines further than you wish them to go, but in
-penciling it is well to extend the lines, free up.
-
-Never use a scale for a ruler.
-
-Do not overload the pen with ink.
-
-Having filled the pen, nearly close the nibs and try the width of the
-line on a piece of paper or the margin of the drawing.
-
-Never refill or lay the pen aside without first cleaning it.
-
-The application of the science of geometry to the drawing-board is
-absolutely necessary to success, for the reason that the whole fabric of
-mechanical drawing rests on the principles of geometry, which is well
-termed the science of measurements.
-
-Section lines should be the last inked and always without previous
-penciling.
-
-Center lines are necessary in working drawings.
-
-In choosing T-squares, care should be exercised to see that the head
-slides up and down the _left_-hand side of the board easily, and that
-when pressed against the board with the left hand there is no “slogging”
-of the blade up or down, or in other words, that the head is bearing
-firmly for its whole length against the board.
-
-The best place for the title of a drawing is said to be the upper
-left-hand corner; this facilitates the filing of the sheet.
-
-Never use a soft pencil except for finishing in shadow lines.
-
-The rubber should always be kept clean.
-
-Great care should be taken to keep drawing boards out of the way of heat
-or damp, as these cause the wood to warp.
-
-Circles and curves are to be “inked in” before straight lines. First ink
-the smallest and afterwards the larger curves.
-
-Do not press heavily on the pencil so as to cut the paper, but draw
-lightly, so that the mark can be erased and leave no trace, especially
-if the drawing is to be inked.
-
-The draughtsman should commence his work at the top of the paper,
-keeping the lower part covered over until he needs to use it.
-
-Shade lines should be avoided in all working drawings, as their use
-interferes with accurate measurements.
-
-To make ink stick to the tracing cloth, with a woolen cloth rub some
-powdered chalk or pounce over the surface on which the ink lines are to
-be drawn, then wipe the surface clean and use a good quality of ink.
-
-For striking small circles a small bow pen should be used.
-
-To fix lead pencil marks on sketches so that they cannot be readily
-erased, sponge them with milk carefully skimmed, then lay blotting paper
-over them and iron with a hot flat-iron.
-
-To have the ink preserve its fluidity and to keep out all dirt and dust,
-keep the cover on the ink slab; the mistake is often made of putting too
-liberal a supply of water in ink well, which causes a waste of both time
-and ink; no more should be prepared than to meet immediate requirements.
-
-Always draw on the right side of the sheet, which can be found by
-holding the sheet up to the light and looking across its surface with
-the eye nearly in the same plane as the paper; note which side is the
-smoothest and has the least number of blemishes on it; this is the right
-side to draw on.
-
-As to sharpening pencils, it is always best to cut a chisel point on the
-pencil used for drawing, and put a circular point on the pencils in the
-bow pencil and pencil leg. The chisel point makes a finer line and lasts
-much longer than a round point.
-
-The varnish used in many large drawing-rooms is simply white shellac
-dissolved in alcohol; it requires a little experience to mix these to a
-proper consistency, but this is soon acquired.
-
-Never sharpen your pencil over the drawing.
-
-A center line of a drawing is the line upon which the figure is to be
-constructed; the center line is the first line to be drawn.
-
-The T-square belongs to the left side of the drawing-board, and is
-operated by the left hand. The right hand should be kept free for the
-purpose of picking up pencil, pen and bows, adjusting and marking off.
-The left hand controls the T-square and the triangle that slides along
-the upper edge of the square; the right hand is for the instruments.
-
-The advantage of a paper rule or scale is that the paper will expand and
-contract under varying degrees of atmospheric moisture the same as the
-drawing does.
-
-Avoid rubbing out and constantly cleaning the drawing with India rubber;
-if wrong lines are made or it is desired to make alterations, the part
-to be changed should be rubbed out and completely re-drawn.
-
-When using the bows see to it that the steel-pointed leg that is put
-down first on the paper, to secure a center for a curve or a circle, is
-a trifle longer than the pencil or pen leg.
-
-To clearly indicate the position of a center which is to be used again,
-lightly pencil a small circle about it; never put the point of a pencil
-in the center hole to enlarge or blacken it; the prick point made by the
-dividers and needle points should be no more than can be just seen,
-hence the circle to be made as advised above.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 294.]
-
-Be particular in having the legs of the dividers exactly the same
-length, and sharp, so that in pricking off distances, and dimensions,
-and centers, the indent or hole made in the paper is as small as
-possible.
-
-The term “plane” means a perfectly flat surface; that is, something
-which has length and breadth but no thickness.
-
-The best way to indicate on the drawing the surfaces which are to be
-finished is to write on the lines which represent the finished surfaces
-“finished,” tool-finish, or “faced,” according to the degree of finish
-required. The single letter _f_ is frequently used.
-
-Avoid fingering the drawing sheet as much as possible; in pointing to
-any part of the drawing use a pencil and not the finger.
-
-Remember that a drawing is made to be read.
-
-The skill in inking does not depend on the fineness of the line, but on
-its clearness.
-
-A soft pencil should never be used on a mechanical drawing unless in
-rare cases when it is used for pencil shading; the hardness or softness
-of pencils is denoted by letters.
-
-Never ink any portion of a drawing until the penciling is entirely
-finished.
-
-Stretching or pasting the paper to the board is very seldom resorted to,
-for the reason that the mechanical drawings are _to scale_ and the paper
-is natural when pinned to the board and more correct than if under a
-strain. Mechanical drawings are always required in practice _right
-away_, and time would be wasted and lost in damping and pasting and
-drying again.
-
-A working drawing, whether made to a scale or not, must have all the
-dimensions plainly written upon it, for a workman should never be
-compelled to measure a drawing.
-
-In marking off distances, centers, etc., a fine needle point is useful;
-the hole should not be punctured through the paper, merely a prick
-point, so that it will leave an impression, which will not be
-obliterated by the use of rubber; drawing-pens are often equipped with
-such a needle point in the end of the handle, that is visible only when
-the pen is unscrewed from the handle; but in the absence of one of this
-kind the point of the divider leg will be of use.
-
-Mechanical construction drawings represent a large amount of mental and
-manual work, as well as a considerable cost in money; hence, they are of
-value quite as much as property which has been acquired by the
-expenditure of either labor or capital. It is wise to keep copies of
-original designs and sketches, as well as data and formulæ, for record
-and comparison.
-
-The best system for keeping drawings is to make them of certain standard
-sizes, and to keep them flat, unrolled, in drawers, numbered, lettered
-and labeled.
-
-In an office where space is limited and drawings have to be rolled it is
-well to use a number of pasteboard cases about three feet long and three
-inches in diameter. These are shown in fig. 294.
-
-A puncture can be made near the top and, when a new drawing or
-blue-print is inserted in this cylindrical case, a cardboard tag can be
-looped through the puncture. This label will give the title and number
-of drawings in that case.
-
-A manuscript book methodically and neatly kept should tell immediately
-the number of the drawing and the case.
-
-Fig. 293 is good for practice in line drawing and also as an optical
-illusion. “You look and are deceived. At first glance you say, ‘Of
-course, those two lines are curved.’ You are mistaken. They are exactly
-parallel. In order to prove this hold them up edgewise to the eye. It
-is, of course, the subsidiary lines which lead the vision astray. It is
-a case of first impressions being quite wrong.”
-
-
-[Illustration: LINEAR PERSPECTIVE]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 295.]
-
-
-
-
-Linear Perspective.
-
-
-It should be mentioned that this subject is outside the limits of
-mechanical drawing, which only deals with objects that can be measured,
-projected or dimensioned to an accurate scale.
-
-But, in rounding out the more formal subjects it is well to look a
-little outside the rigid lines of mechanics into the methods of nature,
-for no system of teaching drawing is complete that does not include some
-explanations for sketching from nature--the objects being always around
-the student, the eye always clear to see and the hand only needing the
-training to make permanent the impressions received.
-
-The word perspective means to _see through_; the word perspective being
-derived from the Latin word _perspicere_, to look through, hence,
-perspective is a science which teaches us to _see_ correctly and enables
-us to represent the _appearance_ of anything we may wish to draw; care
-should be taken in perspective drawing, to select objects interesting in
-themselves, and the best specimens of their class, so as to cultivate
-taste, while they at the same time afford useful and instructive drawing
-lessons.
-
-The meaning of the term linear perspective is a line view; the previous
-examples have been composed of surfaces placed fronting the eye;
-perspective is the science which treats of the changes of form produced
-by viewing them in various oblique positions.
-
-The slightest alteration of _position_ will change the _appearance_ of
-an object; this can be easily shown--for illustration take a coin, the
-actual shape of which is a perfect round; or, strictly speaking, a
-circle. If we take the coin between the thumb and the first finger,
-holding it in an upright position, and exactly facing the eyes, as in
-Fig. 296, it appears of its true form, viz., a circle. If we alter its
-position, balancing it upon the thumb, in a level position, with its
-edge directly opposite the eye, as in Fig. 297, its appearance is
-changed, and what we know to be really a circle, appears to us as a
-straight line.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 296.--Fig. 297.--Fig. 298.]
-
-Now, still balancing the coin upon the thumb, but changing its position
-with regard to the eye, by holding it a little lower than in the last
-position, that is slightly beneath the level of the eye, as in fig. 298,
-we see both the edge and the surface, the coin now appearing neither a
-circle nor a straight line, but a curved figure of an elliptical form.
-Thus the same coin held in three different positions has assumed three
-different shapes.
-
-Let us take two coins of the same size, holding (in the position shown
-at fig. 296) one in each hand. Now, closing one eye, (which will make
-the experiment more clear), hold one coin out at arm’s length, and the
-other at about the distance of a foot from the eye. On comparing them,
-we find that the coin which is further from the eye appears less than
-the nearer one. We know that the coins are really equal in size, yet one
-appears smaller than the other.
-
-We thus see that when we change the position of an object, we have as a
-consequence a change of appearance; also that the change of appearance
-may affect both the shape and the size of the object.
-
-These diversities of appearance may be remarked in everything around us.
-We can observe them in the street by looking at a building from
-different points of view, or by comparing the apparent sizes of the
-street lamps; in the railway station, by watching the arriving or
-departing train; and at sea, by noticing the vessels as they approach,
-or as they retire, ultimately vanishing from our sight in that line
-where the sea and sky appear to meet.
-
-All these interesting variations of appearance are in strict accordance
-with the laws of =GEOMETRY= and =OPTICS=. The former subject has been
-enlarged upon beginning with page 81 of this work, where a line, a
-point, an angle, etc., are defined; other terms are explained at page 41
-and the following pages; to these we add a few definitions essential to
-the subject.
-
-=A PLANE= is a surface which is perfectly even and flat; to use a
-familiar illustration, a plane is like the surface of a sheet of plate
-glass; recollect particularly, that a surface which is at all curved, is
-not a plane.
-
-The =GROUND-PLANE= is the plane on which we stand; the _base-line_ is an
-imaginary line passing through the middle of the feet as we stand square
-and erect; and the _vertical plane_ is supposed to stand on the
-base-line and perpendicular to it.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 299.--See page 255.]
-
-Planes are parallel to each other when they are throughout their entire
-surfaces the same distance apart.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 300.]
-
-=THE PERSPECTIVE PLANE= is an upright square of glass, usually framed
-like a picture, with a base, so that it can stand up alone. This is
-placed between the eye of the spectator and the subject to be drawn, and
-as the drawing is sometimes made directly upon it, it is sometimes
-called the _Picture_ or the _Plane of the Picture_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 301.]
-
-=HORIZONTAL= means perfectly level, like the surface of still water. We
-must be careful to understand perfectly the difference between the terms
-“level” and “even” or “flat.” A surface may be even or flat, without
-being level. Thus the wall is even and flat, but it is upright, not
-level; level means a fixed, constant position.
-
-In fig. 301 a house is shown in perspective in which the line _H L_ is
-the line of the horizon and _V P_ is the,--
-
-=VANISHING POINT.=--The vanishing point is familiarly represented by the
-rails on a trolley track on a straight road, which seem to approach each
-other in the distance, as shown in fig. 302 at _V P_.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 302.]
-
-_All parallel lines seen in perspective appear to meet in the same
-vanishing point._
-
-The value of the vanishing point may be seen in the view of a wooden
-house, fig. 303, where it (_V P_) gives direction to the retiring lines
-of the roof, side planks and door.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 303.]
-
-=POINT OF SIGHT.=--This is that point in the eye where the lines or rays
-from the object cross each other, as shown at _P_ in fig. 305, also in
-fig. 299 at _S_.
-
-=VERTICAL= means perfectly upright. If we attach a piece of thread to a
-weight, a small piece of lead for example, and hold the thread with the
-lead hanging downwards, the thread will fall in an upright or vertical
-position.
-
-=PARALLEL= lines are said to be parallel to each other when they are
-throughout their whole lengths the same distance apart.
-
-=PERPENDICULAR.= When one straight line, meeting another, makes the
-angles at the point of contact equal, each of the angles is called a
-right angle, and the lines are said to be perpendicular to each other.
-Remember especially that perpendicular and vertical have not the same
-meaning. Vertical means an unvarying upright position. Perpendicular
-means that one line or plane meets another line or plane at right
-angles.
-
-The fig. 295 on page 246 is a study in perspective, showing a water
-reflection. As rays from every visible part of the object are reflected,
-all following the same law, the reflection will appear to the eye
-_inverted_, and of the _same size as the object_. The arch itself forms
-the upper half of a hollow cylinder, and the reflection forms the lower
-half. The reflection shows much more of the interior of the arch than
-can be seen directly. The leaning tree, the boy fishing, and the
-receding banks, all are seen in accordance with the laws of reflection
-and perspective.
-
-=THE HORIZONTAL LINE, THE POINT OF SIGHT AND THE VANISHING POINTS= are
-the principal items. These should be studied in every room and during
-every walk, and the more pleasing accidents of form stored in the mind
-or committed to paper for future use.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 304.]
-
-=OPTICS=, the science of sight, gives us the following laws:
-
-1. That we see by the agency of light.
-
-2. That light passes from objects to our eyes.
-
-3. That light travels in straight lines, which are called Visual Rays.
-
-The human eye may be briefly described as a chamber of a spherical or
-globular form, with a circular opening in front. This circular opening
-is called the pupil, and through it the visual rays pass to the interior
-of the eye. The visual rays, passing from space in all directions
-through the small pupil, are received upon what may be called the
-interior wall of the globular chamber forming the eye (see fig. 305).
-This interior wall is called the retina, and upon it the impressions of
-external objects are received, just as they are received upon a screen
-in a dark chamber. These impressions are conveyed by the optic nerve
-from the retina to the brain.
-
-In front of the pupil is a segment of a small sphere, composed of the
-cornea and the aqueous humor, both of which are transparent, and from
-their shape and density have a convergent effect upon the rays passing
-through them.
-
-Behind the pupil is the transparent crystalline lens, which, from its
-shape and its elasticity, is a powerful agent in aiding the convergence
-of the rays, and in bringing objects at various distances to a clear
-focus upon the retina.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 305.]
-
-The pupil has the power of contraction and dilation, which is influenced
-by the quantity of light entering the eye, but when it is dilated to the
-utmost its size is very small in comparison with the great chamber
-forming the body of the eye.
-
-In fig. 305 we have a rough sectional diagram of the eye and an object
-in front of it. This object, an arrow, is seen by means of the visual
-rays proceeding from it, the principal two of which are shown. The
-visual ray from _A_ passes through the pupil and is received upon the
-retina at _a_. In the same way the visual ray from _B_ passes through
-the pupil and is received upon the retina at _b_. It will thus be seen
-that the impressions or images received upon the retina are inverted;
-but, by long reason and experience, the mind has acquired the habit of
-determining the real positions of objects, and does not, though the
-image is so received, imagine them to be upside down.
-
-It will also be observed, in the same way, that that portion of an
-object which is upon the right will be pictured upon the retina upon the
-left, and _vice versa_, but the mind, for the reasons before stated,
-never imagines the object to be reversed. This fact is another proof
-that, as mentioned at the commencement of our study, to see accurately
-is a matter of education and practice.
-
-And first of Optics; it was asserted, page 252, that we see by the
-agency of light which passes from objects to our eyes in straight lines
-which are called Visual Rays.
-
-We see by the agency of light, as all objects, except such as may be
-styled self-luminous, when placed in a dark chamber are not perceivable
-by us, except by touch, smell or hearing; we cannot _see_ them; they are
-invisible. But when, by removing a shutter or igniting a flame, we
-introduce something to the chamber which was not present when the
-chamber was dark, we become at once conscious of the appearance of the
-object, we perceive it by the sense of sight.
-
-This something which must always be present to enable us to see, is
-called Light; all objects are made visible to the sense of seeing by its
-agency.
-
-Without light, natural or artificial, it would be impossible to
-distinguish one object from another.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 306.]
-
-That the Visual Rays pass from objects in straight lines to the eye may
-be proved by the following experiment (see fig. 306):--Pierce two
-screens with a large pin, and place them so that the holes are in a
-straight line with a flame, as the light of a candle or lamp. On fixing
-the eye to one of these holes we are able to see the flame; but if we
-slightly move the flame, one of the screens, or the eye, the flame is no
-longer visible. To be visible, the flame, the holes in the screens, and
-the eye must all be in the same straight line. See fig. 306.
-
-In fig. 299 the picture plane is represented by the rectangle _W X Y Z_.
-Although the picture plane is here shown as a rectangle, it may be of
-any shape or of any size.
-
-The observer is at _S_, looking through the picture plane at the cross
-_R C O H_. The observer is standing upon a horizontal surface, which is
-called the ground plane. If we are in a room, the window may be called a
-picture plane and the floor a ground plane.
-
-The picture plane rests, as it were, upon the ground plane, in a line
-which passes from _Y_ to _Z_. The two planes meet or intersect in this
-line, which is called the ground line. The ground line is sometimes
-called the picture line, or the measuring line.
-
-The visual rays, by means of which the observer sees the cross, will, in
-their course from it to the eye, pass through the picture plane. These
-visual rays will intersect the picture plane in a number of points, and
-if we mark the true positions of these points the result will be a
-perspective image of the cross.
-
-The rays are shown passing from the cross to the eye of the observer,
-and meeting the picture plane in points _r_, _c_, _o_, _h_; _r_ being
-joined to _o_, and _c_ to _h_, we have the perspective image of the
-cross as it would appear to the observer at _S_. Of course an infinite
-number of rays proceed from the cross to the eye of the observer; but it
-is quite evident that we need only consider those proceeding from the
-extremities of the object.
-
-
-Scale or Approximate Perspective.
-
- Real, or true perspective, represents the object exactly as it is seen
- in nature, where the parts that are far away from the eye of the
- observer appear smaller than those nearby. Occasions arise, however,
- in practical life, with its numerous phases of industrial
- requirements, where the convenience of showing the complete form of
- the object in a single view might preferably be coupled with the
- convenience of scale dimensions.
-
-This has led to a modified perspective, that sacrifices some of the
-accuracy in the appearance of the object to gain the advantage of scale
-dimensions; this form of perspective may be distinguished by the
-name--_approximate or scale perspective_--which does not represent the
-object exactly as seen in nature, but where those parts that are afar
-off are shown of the same size as those that are near by, and where the
-lines that run out into space are parallel to each other and do not
-converge into a vanishing point.
-
-To represent an object in perspective, the horizon and the point of
-vision will have to appear in the drawing as the fundamental starting
-points.
-
-Three dimensions are distinguished for the fixing of an object in space
-from a certain reference point. They are height, breadth and thickness,
-and are in their direction square to each other. The height is the
-fundamental direction, being derived from the direction of gravity, that
-invariably extends to the center of the earth.
-
-All directions in the perspective determination of an object are
-parallel to these.
-
-Vertical lines and planes point toward the center of the earth, while
-horizontal planes, including the directions of breadth and thickness,
-are square to the vertical direction. In this, the principal visual ray
-extends in the direction of thickness.
-
-For a clear understanding of perspective, it must be firmly fixed in
-mind, that for each prominent point of the object behind the picture
-plane, a corresponding point lies in the picture plane, in that position
-where a straight line or ray of sight that is going from the eye to the
-point of the object, cuts through the picture plane.
-
-Suppose we could replace these rays of sight by thin, visible threads of
-wire that would go through little holes in the picture plane, we could
-then walk around this bundle of rays, and by looking at it from three
-different directions, we would get three different views of it. We may
-look upon it from the top, from the side or from the end, where the
-bundle of rays all concentrate in the eye of the observer.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 307.]
-
-Figs. 307 and 308 show, in two cases, how these three views would
-appear. The end views are those where the perspective picture appears on
-the plane, while the top and side views only show where the rays
-intersect the picture plane. The top view shows how far, for example,
-point _A_ is distant from a vertical line _O Z_, while the side view
-shows how far point _A_ is below horizontal line _O X_, which is at the
-same height above the ground as the eye of the observer, _O_. Thus, all
-points of the cube can be located on the picture plane, and the outlines
-of the cube reproduced in perspective.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 308.]
-
-Modified arrangements are shown in figs. 309 and 310 for parallel and
-angular perspective.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 309.]
-
-The views are so arranged in relation to each other that the picture
-plane in the top view is parallel to the horizon and the ground-line,
-which latter is the intersection of the picture plane with the level
-ground of the end or perspective view. At the same time the eye of the
-observer is in one and the same vertical line for both views, two
-vanishing points may be found in the horizon outside of the principal
-visual ray. To find the position of these two vanishing points in the
-picture plane, the modified top view, fig. 310, is used.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 310.]
-
-As all lines that end in a vanishing point must be parallel in reality,
-this parallelism may be seen in the top view and lines through the eye
-of the observer, parallel to the directions of the main lines of the
-object, will cut the picture plane at the vanishing points.
-
-Through these two vanishing points the directions of two sets of lines
-are found, the starting points of which are determined from the plane of
-measurement. The third set of lines, being vertical, also appears
-vertical and parallel in the picture.
-
-The position of each vertical line is found in the top view, where the
-light rays from the observing eye to the ends of the vertical lines
-intersect with the picture plane. Projecting these points down upon the
-rays to the vanishing points produces the vertical lines in the picture.
-
-For example, in fig. 311, the purpose of perspective is entirely
-defeated by placing the eye of the observer directly in front of the
-object and arriving at the view taken in mechanical drawing which needs
-supplementary views for complete comprehension of the form of the
-object.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 311.]
-
-In fig. 312 the eye of the observer is first placed directly opposite
-the object, then it sees the object to the left but a short distance
-away, while in the third figure the observer is farther away from the
-object. In each case the picture plane and plane of measurement is at
-the front face of the cube.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 312.]
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 312 (second part).]
-
-For such simple objects, it is not necessary to draw the top view at
-all. The only reminder of the top view is the eye or point of vision,
-the picture plane that falls together for the sake of convenience with
-the horizon of the end view and the ray that determines the measurement
-point _M_, which is, in this suppressed reproduction, absolutely
-necessary, in order to find the apparent position of the real corners
-behind the picture plane.
-
-So far, only square or sharp-cornered objects have been represented in
-perspective.
-
-It is evident, however, that round objects can also be shown in linear
-perspective, placing reference lines on the object and representing
-these as if they were real lines. A cylinder is thus shown in fig. 313
-of which the end planes will appear very distinctly in sharp outlines.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 313.]
-
-Vertically, only the outlines of the cylinder, as contrasted against
-space, will appear as distinct outlines, while the reference lines will
-not appear and are therefore shown only as dotted lines.
-
-Fig. 314 shows the approximate or scale perspective with all the axes
-drawn and the corresponding angles and scales marked. The outlines of
-the object running in these directions appear all parallel to the axes.
-
-The approximate or scale perspective completely avoids all the
-difficulties of choosing a point of sight, of having several views,
-vanishing points and measurement points, and thus offers a
-representative view, with a great saving of time and labor. Particularly
-for mechanical purposes, where an artistic impression is not called for,
-it presents a distinct advantage over the true or real perspective.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 314.]
-
-
-[Illustration: TABLES
-
-AND
-
-INDEX]
-
-[Illustration: MARINERS’ COMPASS.]
-
-
-
-
-Useful Tables for Draughtsmen.
-
-
-TABLE OF DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS.
-
-8ths, 16ths, 32ds and 64ths of an Inch.
-
- 8ths.
-
- ¹⁄₈ = .125
- ¹⁄₄ = .250
- ³⁄₈ = .375
- ¹⁄₂ = .500
- ⁵⁄₈ = .625
- ³⁄₄ = .750
- ⁷⁄₈ = .875
-
- 16ths.
-
- ¹⁄₁₆ = .0625
- ³⁄₁₆ = .1875
- ⁵⁄₁₆ = .3125
- ⁷⁄₁₆ = .4375
- ⁹⁄₁₆ = .5625
- ¹¹⁄₁₆ = .6875
- ¹³⁄₁₆ = .8125
- ¹⁵⁄₁₆ = .9375
-
- 32nds.
-
- ¹⁄₃₂ = .03125
- ³⁄₃₂ = .09375
- ⁵⁄₃₂ = .15625
- ⁷⁄₃₂ = .21875
- ⁹⁄₃₂ = .28125
- ¹¹⁄₃₂ = .34375
- ¹³⁄₃₂ = .40625
- ¹⁵⁄₃₂ = .46875
- ¹⁷⁄₃₂ = .53125
- ¹⁹⁄₃₂ = .59375
- ²¹⁄₃₂ = .65625
- ²³⁄₃₂ = .71875
- ²⁵⁄₃₂ = .78125
- ²⁷⁄₃₂ = .84375
- ²⁹⁄₃₂ = .90625
- ³¹⁄₃₂ = .96875
-
- 64ths.
-
- ¹⁄₆₄ = .015625
- ³⁄₆₄ = .046875
- ⁵⁄₆₄ = .078125
- ⁷⁄₆₄ = .109375
- ⁹⁄₆₄ = .140625
- ¹¹⁄₆₄ = .171875
- ¹³⁄₆₄ = .203125
- ¹⁵⁄₆₄ = .234375
- ¹⁷⁄₆₄ = .265625
- ¹⁹⁄₆₄ = .296875
- ²¹⁄₆₄ = .328125
- ²³⁄₆₄ = .359375
- ²⁵⁄₆₄ = .390625
- ²⁷⁄₆₄ = .421875
- ²⁹⁄₆₄ = .453125
- ³¹⁄₆₄ = .484375
- ³³⁄₆₄ = .515625
- ³⁵⁄₆₄ = .546875
- ³⁷⁄₆₄ = .578125
- ³⁹⁄₆₄ = .609375
- ⁴¹⁄₆₄ = .640625
- ⁴³⁄₆₄ = .671875
- ⁴⁵⁄₆₄ = .703125
- ⁴⁷⁄₆₄ = .734375
- ⁴⁹⁄₆₄ = .765625
- ⁵¹⁄₆₄ = .796875
- ⁵³⁄₆₄ = .828125
- ⁵⁵⁄₆₄ = .859375
- ⁵⁷⁄₆₄ = .890625
- ⁵⁹⁄₆₄ = .921875
- ⁶¹⁄₆₄ = .953125
- ⁶³⁄₆₄ = .984375
-
-
-TABLE OF DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
-
-Of Millimeters and Fractions of Millimeters.
-
- _mm._ _Inches._
-
- ¹⁄₅₀ = .00079
- ²⁄₅₀ = .00157
- ³⁄₅₀ = .00236
- ⁴⁄₅₀ = .00315
- ⁵⁄₅₀ = .00394
- ⁶⁄₅₀ = .00472
- ⁷⁄₅₀ = .00551
- ⁸⁄₅₀ = .00630
- ⁹⁄₅₀ = .00709
- ¹⁰⁄₅₀ = .00787
- ¹¹⁄₅₀ = .00866
- ¹²⁄₅₀ = .00945
- ¹³⁄₅₀ = .01024
- ¹⁴⁄₅₀ = .01102
- ¹⁵⁄₅₀ = .01181
- ¹⁶⁄₅₀ = .01260
- ¹⁷⁄₅₀ = .01339
- ¹⁸⁄₅₀ = .01417
- ¹⁹⁄₅₀ = .01496
- ²⁰⁄₅₀ = .01575
- ²¹⁄₅₀ = .01654
- ²²⁄₅₀ = .01732
- ²³⁄₅₀ = .01811
- ²⁴⁄₅₀ = .01890
- ²⁵⁄₅₀ = .01969
- ²⁶⁄₅₀ = .02047
- ²⁷⁄₅₀ = .02126
- ²⁸⁄₅₀ = .02205
- ²⁹⁄₅₀ = .02283
- ³⁰⁄₅₀ = .02362
- ³¹⁄₅₀ = .02441
- ³²⁄₅₀ = .02520
- ³³⁄₅₀ = .02598
- ³⁴⁄₅₀ = .02677
- ³⁵⁄₅₀ = .02756
- ³⁶⁄₅₀ = .02835
- ³⁷⁄₅₀ = .02913
- ³⁸⁄₅₀ = .02992
- ³⁹⁄₅₀ = .03071
- ⁴⁰⁄₅₀ = .03150
- ⁴¹⁄₅₀ = .03228
- ⁴²⁄₅₀ = .03307
- ⁴³⁄₅₀ = .03386
- ⁴⁴⁄₅₀ = .03465
- ⁴⁵⁄₅₀ = .03543
- ⁴⁶⁄₅₀ = .03622
- ⁴⁷⁄₅₀ = .03701
- ⁴⁸⁄₅₀ = .03780
- ⁴⁹⁄₅₀ = .03858
- 1 = .03937
- 2 = .07874
- 3 = .11811
- 4 = .15748
- 5 = .19685
- 6 = .23622
- 7 = .27559
- 8 = .31496
- 9 = .35433
- 10 = .39370
- 11 = .43307
- 12 = .47244
- 13 = .51181
- 14 = .55118
- 15 = .59055
- 16 = .62992
- 17 = .66929
- 18 = .70866
- 19 = .74803
- 20 = .78740
- 21 = .82677
- 22 = .86614
- 23 = .90551
- 24 = .94488
- 25 = .98425
- 26 = 1.02362
-
- 10 mm. = 1 Centimeter = 0.3937 inches.
- 10 cm. = 1 Decimeter = 3.937 „
- 10 dm. = 1 Meter = 39.37 „
- 25.4 mm. = 1 English Inch.
-
-
-RULES RELATIVE TO THE CIRCLE.
-
-The circle contains a greater area than any other plane figure bounded
-by an equal perimeter or outline.
-
-TO FIND CIRCUMFERENCE--
-
- Multiply diameter by 3.1416.
- Or divide diameter by 0.3183.
-
-TO FIND DIAMETER--
-
- Multiply circumference by 0.3183.
- Or divide circumference by 3.1416.
-
-TO FIND RADIUS--
-
- Multiply circumference by 0.15915.
- Or divide circumference by 6.28318.
-
-TO FIND SIDE OF AN INSCRIBED SQUARE--
-
- Multiply diameter by 0.7071.
- Or multiply circumference by 0.2251.
- Or divide circumference by 4.4428.
-
-TO FIND SIDE OF AN EQUAL SQUARE--
-
- Multiply diameter by 0.8862.
- Or divide diameter by 1.1284.
- Or multiply circumference by 0.2821.
- Or divide circumference by 3.545.
-
-SQUARE--
-
- A side multiplied by 1.4142 equals diameter of its circumscribing
- circle.
- A side multiplied by 4.443 equals circumference of its circumscribing
- circle.
- A side multiplied by 1.128 equals diameter }
- A side multiplied by 3.545 equals circumference } of an equal circle.
- A side multiplied by 1.273 equals circle inches }
-
-TO FIND THE AREA OF A CIRCLE--
-
- Multiply circumference by one-quarter of the diameter.
- Or multiply the square of diameter by 0.7854.
- Or multiply the square of circumference by .07958.
- Or multiply the square of ¹⁄₂ diameter by 3.1416.
-
- Contents of cylinder = area of end × length. Contents of wedge = area
- of base × ¹⁄₂ altitude. Surface of cylinder = area of both ends ×
- length × circumference. Surface of sphere = diameter squared × 3.1416,
- or = diameter × circumference. Contents of sphere = diameter cubed ×
- .5236. Contents of pyramid or cone, right or oblique, regular or
- irregular = area of base × ¹⁄₃ altitude. Area of triangle = base × ¹⁄₂
- altitude. Area of parallelogram = base × altitude. Area of trapezoid =
- altitude × ¹⁄₂ the sum of parallel sides.
-
-
-ROMAN TABLE.
-
- I. denotes One.
- II. „ Two.
- III. „ Three.
- IV. „ Four.
- V. „ Five.
- VI. „ Six.
- VII. „ Seven.
- VIII. „ Eight.
- IX. „ Nine.
- X. „ Ten.
- XI. „ Eleven.
- XII. „ Twelve.
- XIII. „ Thirteen.
- XIV. „ Fourteen.
- XV. „ Fifteen.
- XVI. „ Sixteen.
- XVII. „ Seventeen.
- XVIII. „ Eighteen.
- XIX. „ Nineteen.
- XX. „ Twenty.
- XXX. „ Thirty.
- XL. „ Forty.
- L. „ Fifty.
- LX. „ Sixty.
- LXX. „ Seventy.
- LXXX. „ Eighty.
- XC. „ Ninety.
- C. „ One hundred.
- D. „ Five hundred.
- M. „ One thousand.
- X̅. „ Ten thousand.
- M̅. „ One million.
-
-
-SOLID MEASURE, OR CUBIC MEASURE.
-
-This is used in measuring bodies, or things having length, breadth and
-height or depth.
-
-TABLE.
-
- 1728 cubic inches (cu. in.) make 1 cubic foot (cu. ft.).
- 27 cubic feet, „ 1 cubic yard (cu. yd.).
- 128 cubic feet, „ 1 cord (C.).
-
-
-CIRCULAR MEASURE.
-
- 60 seconds (″) make 1 minute (′).
- 60 minutes „ 1 degree (°).
- 360 degrees „ 1 circum. (C.).
-
-The circumference of every circle whatever, is supposed to be divided
-into 360 equal parts, called _degrees_.
-
-A degree is ¹⁄₃₆₀ of the circumference of any circle, small or large.
-
-A quadrant is a fourth of a circumference, or an arc of 90 degrees.
-
-A degree is divided into 60 parts called minutes, expressed by the sign
-(′), and each minute is divided into 60 seconds, expressed by (″); so
-that the circumference of any circle contains 21,600 minutes, or
-1,296,000 seconds.
-
-
-LONG MEASURE--MEASURES OF LENGTH.
-
- 12 inches = 1 foot.
- 3 feet = 1 yard.
- 5¹⁄₂ yards = 1 rod.
- 40 rods = 1 furlong.
- 8 furlongs = 1 common mile.
- 3 miles = 1 league.
-
-The mile (5,280 feet) of the above table is the legal mile of the United
-States and England, and is called the statute mile.
-
-
-Tables of Diameters, Circumferences and Areas of Circles.
-
- -----+-----------+----------
- Diam.| Area. | Circum.
- -----+-----------+----------
- 0.0 | |
- .1 | .007854| .31416
- .2 | .031416| .62832
- .3 | .070686| .94248
- .4 | .12566 | 1.2566
- | |
- .5 | .19735 | 1.5708
- .6 | .28274 | 1.8850
- .7 | .38485 | 2.1991
- .8 | .50266 | 2.5133
- .9 | .63617 | 2.8274
- | |
- 1.0 | .7854 | 3.1416
- .1 | .9503 | 3.4558
- .2 | 1.1310 | 3.7699
- .3 | 1.3273 | 4.0841
- .4 | 1.5394 | 4.3982
- | |
- .5 | 1.7671 | 4.7124
- .6 | 2.0106 | 5.0265
- .7 | 2.2698 | 5.3407
- .8 | 2.5447 | 5.6549
- .9 | 2.8353 | 5.9690
- | |
- 2.0 | 3.1416 | 6.2832
- .1 | 3.4636 | 6.5973
- .2 | 3.8013 | 6.9115
- .3 | 4.1548 | 7.2257
- .4 | 4.5239 | 7.5398
- | |
- .5 | 4.9087 | 7.8540
- .6 | 5.3093 | 8.1681
- .7 | 5.7256 | 8.4823
- .8 | 6.1575 | 8.7965
- .9 | 6.6052 | 9.1106
- | |
- 3.0 | 7.0686 | 9.4248
- .1 | 7.5477 | 9.7389
- .2 | 8.0425 | 10.0531
- .3 | 8.5530 | 10.3673
- .4 | 9.0792 | 10.6814
- | |
- .5 | 9.6211 | 10.9956
- .6 | 10.1788 | 11.3097
- .7 | 10.7521 | 11.6239
- .8 | 11.3411 | 11.9381
- .9 | 11.9456 | 12.2522
- | |
- 4.0 | 12.5664 | 12.5664
- .1 | 13.2025 | 12.8805
- .2 | 13.8544 | 13.1947
- .3 | 14.5220 | 13.5088
- .4 | 15.2053 | 13.8230
- | |
- .5 | 15.9043 | 14.1372
- .6 | 16.6190 | 14.4513
- .7 | 17.3494 | 14.7655
- .8 | 18.0956 | 15.0796
- .9 | 18.8574 | 15.3938
- | |
- 5.0 | 19.6350 | 15.7080
- .1 | 20.4282 | 16.0221
- .2 | 21.2372 | 16.3363
- .3 | 22.0618 | 16.6504
- .4 | 22.9022 | 16.9646
- | |
- .5 | 23.7583 | 17.2788
- .6 | 24.6301 | 17.5929
- .7 | 25.5176 | 17.9071
- .8 | 26.4208 | 18.2212
- .9 | 27.3397 | 18.5354
- | |
- 6.0 | 28.2743 | 18.8496
- .1 | 29.2247 | 19.1637
- .2 | 30.1907 | 19.4779
- .3 | 31.1725 | 19.7920
- .4 | 32.1699 | 20.1062
- | |
- .5 | 33.1831 | 20.4204
- .6 | 34.2119 | 20.7345
- .7 | 35.2565 | 21.0487
- .8 | 36.3168 | 21.3628
- .9 | 37.3928 | 21.6770
- | |
- 7.0 | 38.4845 | 21.9911
- .1 | 39.5919 | 22.3053
- .2 | 40.7150 | 22.6195
- .3 | 41.8539 | 22.9336
- .4 | 43.0084 | 23.2478
- | |
- .5 | 44.1786 | 23.5619
- .6 | 45.3646 | 23.8761
- .7 | 46.5663 | 24.1903
- .8 | 47.7836 | 24.5044
- .9 | 49.0167 | 24.8186
- | |
- 8.0 | 50.2655 | 25.1327
- .1 | 51.5300 | 25.4469
- .2 | 52.8102 | 25.7611
- .3 | 54.1061 | 26.0752
- .4 | 55.4177 | 26.3894
- | |
- .5 | 56.7450 | 26.7035
- .6 | 58.0880 | 27.0177
- .7 | 59.4468 | 27.3319
- .8 | 60.8212 | 27.6460
- .9 | 62.2114 | 27.9602
- | |
- 9.0 | 63.6173 | 28.2743
- .1 | 65.0388 | 28.5885
- .2 | 66.4761 | 28.9027
- .3 | 67.9291 | 29.2168
- .4 | 69.3978 | 29.5310
- | |
- .5 | 70.8822 | 29.8451
- .6 | 72.3823 | 30.1593
- .7 | 73.8981 | 30.4734
- .8 | 75.4296 | 30.7876
- .9 | 76.9769 | 31.1018
- | |
- 10.0 | 78.5398 | 31.4159
- .1 | 80.1185 | 31.7301
- .2 | 81.7128 | 32.0442
- .3 | 83.3229 | 32.3584
- .4 | 84.9487 | 32.6726
- | |
- .5 | 86.5901 | 32.9887
- .6 | 88.2473 | 33.3009
- .7 | 89.9202 | 33.6150
- .8 | 91.6088 | 33.9292
- .9 | 93.3132 | 34.2434
- | |
- 11.0 | 95.0332 | 34.5575
- .1 | 96.7689 | 34.8717
- .2 | 98.5203 | 35.1858
- .3 | 100.2875 | 35.5000
- .4 | 102.0703 | 35.8142
- | |
- .5 | 103.8689 | 36.1283
- .6 | 105.6832 | 36.4425
- .7 | 107.5132 | 36.7566
- .8 | 109.3588 | 37.0708
- .9 | 111.2202 | 37.3850
- | |
- 12.0 | 113.0973 | 37.6991
- .1 | 114.9901 | 38.0133
- .2 | 116.8987 | 38.3274
- .3 | 118.8229 | 38.6416
- .4 | 120.7628 | 38.9557
- | |
- .5 | 122.7185 | 39.2099
- .6 | 124.6898 | 39.6841
- .7 | 126.6769 | 39.8982
- .8 | 128.6796 | 40.2121
- .9 | 130.6981 | 40.5265
- | |
- 13.0 | 132.7323 | 40.8407
- .1 | 134.7822 | 41.1549
- .2 | 136.8478 | 41.4690
- .3 | 138.9291 | 41.7832
- .4 | 141.0261 | 42.0973
- | |
- .5 | 143.1388 | 42.4116
- .6 | 145.2672 | 42.7257
- .7 | 147.4114 | 43.0398
- .8 | 149.5712 | 43.3540
- .9 | 151.7468 | 43.6681
- | |
- 14.0 | 153.9380 | 43.9823
- .1 | 156.1450 | 44.2965
- .2 | 158.3677 | 44.6106
- .3 | 160.6061 | 44.9248
- .4 | 162.8602 | 45.2389
- | |
- .5 | 165.1300 | 45.5531
- .6 | 167.4155 | 45.8673
- .7 | 169.7167 | 46.1814
- .8 | 172.0336 | 46.4956
- .9 | 174.3662 | 46.8097
- | |
- 15.0 | 176.7146 | 47.1239
- .1 | 179.0786 | 47.4380
- .2 | 181.4584 | 47.7522
- .3 | 183.8539 | 48.0664
- .4 | 186.2650 | 48.3805
- | |
- .5 | 188.6919 | 48.6947
- .6 | 191.1345 | 49.0088
- .7 | 193.5928 | 49.3230
- .8 | 196.0668 | 49.6372
- .9 | 198.5565 | 49.9513
- | |
- 16.0 | 201.0619 | 50.2655
- .1 | 203.5831 | 50.5796
- .2 | 206.1199 | 50.8938
- .3 | 208.6724 | 51.2080
- .4 | 211.2407 | 51.5221
- | |
- .5 | 213.8246 | 51.8363
- .6 | 216.4243 | 52.1504
- .7 | 219.0397 | 52.4646
- .8 | 221.6708 | 52.7788
- .9 | 224.3176 | 53.0929
- | |
- 17.0 | 226.9801 | 53.4071
- .1 | 229.6583 | 53.7212
- .2 | 232.3522 | 54.0354
- .3 | 235.0618 | 54.3496
- .4 | 237.7871 | 54.6637
- | |
- .5 | 240.5282 | 54.9779
- .6 | 243.2849 | 55.2920
- .7 | 246.0574 | 55.6062
- .8 | 248.8456 | 55.9203
- .9 | 251.6494 | 56.2345
- | |
- 18.0 | 254.4690 | 56.5486
- .1 | 257.3043 | 56.8628
- .2 | 260.1553 | 57.1770
- .3 | 263.0220 | 57.4911
- .4 | 265.9044 | 57.8053
- | |
- .5 | 268.8025 | 58.1195
- .6 | 271.7164 | 58.4336
- .7 | 274.6459 | 58.7478
- .8 | 277.5911 | 59.0619
- .9 | 280.5521 | 59.3761
- | |
- 19.0 | 283.5287 | 59.6903
- .1 | 286.5211 | 60.0044
- .2 | 289.5292 | 60.3186
- .3 | 292.5530 | 60.6327
- .4 | 295.5925 | 60.9469
- | |
- .5 | 298.6477 | 61.2611
- .6 | 301.7186 | 61.5752
- .7 | 304.8052 | 61.8894
- .8 | 307.9075 | 62.2035
- .9 | 311.0255 | 62.5177
- | |
- 20.0 | 314.1593 | 62.8319
- .1 | 317.3087 | 63.1460
- .2 | 320.4739 | 63.4602
- .3 | 323.6547 | 63.7743
- .4 | 326.8513 | 64.0885
- | |
- .5 | 330.0636 | 64.4026
- .6 | 333.2916 | 64.7168
- .7 | 336.5353 | 65.0310
- .8 | 339.7947 | 65.3451
- .9 | 343.0698 | 65.6593
- | |
- 21.0 | 346.3606 | 65.9734
- .1 | 349.6671 | 66.2876
- .2 | 352.9894 | 66.6018
- .3 | 356.3273 | 66.9159
- .4 | 359.6809 | 67.2301
- | |
- .5 | 363.0503 | 67.5442
- .6 | 266.4354 | 67.8584
- .7 | 369.8361 | 68.1726
- .8 | 373.2526 | 68.4867
- .9 | 376.6848 | 68.8009
- | |
- 22.0 | 380.1327 | 69.1150
- .1 | 383.5963 | 69.4292
- .2 | 387.0756 | 69.7434
- .3 | 390.5707 | 70.0575
- .4 | 394.0814 | 70.3717
- | |
- .5 | 397.6078 | 70.6858
- .6 | 401.1500 | 71.0000
- .7 | 404.7078 | 71.3142
- .8 | 408.2814 | 71.6283
- .9 | 411.8707 | 71.9425
- | |
- 23.0 | 415.4756 | 72.2566
- .1 | 419.0993 | 72.5708
- .2 | 422.7327 | 72.8849
- .3 | 426.3848 | 73.1991
- .4 | 430.0526 | 73.5133
- | |
- .5 | 433.7361 | 73.8274
- .6 | 437.4354 | 74.1416
- .7 | 441.1503 | 74.4557
- .8 | 444.8809 | 74.7699
- .9 | 448.6273 | 75.0841
- | |
- 24.0 | 452.3893 | 75.3982
- .1 | 456.1671 | 75.7424
- .2 | 459.9606 | 76.0265
- .3 | 463.7693 | 76.3407
- .4 | 467.5947 | 76.6549
- | |
- .5 | 471.4352 | 76.9690
- .6 | 475.2916 | 77.2832
- .7 | 479.1636 | 77.5973
- .8 | 483.0513 | 77.9115
- .9 | 486.9547 | 78.2257
- | |
- 25.0 | 490.8739 | 78.5398
- .1 | 494.8087 | 78.8540
- .2 | 498.7592 | 79.1681
- .3 | 502.7255 | 79.4823
- .4 | 506.7075 | 79.7965
- | |
- .5 | 510.7052 | 80.1106
- .6 | 514.7185 | 80.4248
- .7 | 518.7476 | 80.7389
- .8 | 522.7924 | 81.0531
- .9 | 526.8529 | 81.3672
- | |
- 26.0 | 530.9292 | 81.6814
- .1 | 535.0211 | 81.9956
- .2 | 539.1287 | 82.3097
- .3 | 543.2521 | 82.6239
- .4 | 547.3911 | 82.9380
- | |
- .5 | 551.5459 | 83.2522
- .6 | 555.7163 | 83.5664
- .7 | 559.9025 | 83.8805
- .8 | 564.1044 | 84.1947
- .9 | 568.3220 | 84.5088
- | |
- 27.0 | 572.5553 | 84.8230
- .1 | 576.8043 | 85.1372
- .2 | 581.0690 | 85.4513
- .3 | 585.3494 | 85.7655
- .4 | 589.6455 | 86.0796
- | |
- .5 | 593.9574 | 86.3938
- .6 | 598.2849 | 86.7080
- .7 | 602.6282 | 87.0221
- .8 | 606.9871 | 87.3363
- .9 | 611.3618 | 87.6504
- | |
- 28.0 | 615.7522 | 87.9646
- .1 | 620.1582 | 88.2788
- .2 | 624.5800 | 88.5929
- .3 | 629.0175 | 88.9071
- .4 | 633.4707 | 89.2212
- | |
- .5 | 637.9397 | 89.5354
- .6 | 642.4243 | 89.8495
- .7 | 646.9246 | 90.1637
- .8 | 651.4407 | 90.4779
- .9 | 655.9724 | 90.7920
- | |
- 29.0 | 660.5199 | 91.1063
- .1 | 665.0830 | 91.4203
- .2 | 669.6619 | 91.7345
- .3 | 674.2565 | 92.0487
- .4 | 678.8668 | 92.3628
- | |
- .5 | 683.4928 | 92.6770
- .6 | 688.1345 | 92.9911
- .7 | 692.7919 | 93.3053
- .8 | 697.4650 | 93.6195
- .9 | 702.1538 | 93.9336
- | |
- 30.0 | 706.8583 | 94.2478
- .1 | 711.5786 | 94.5610
- .2 | 716.3145 | 94.8761
- .3 | 721.0662 | 95.1903
- .4 | 725.8336 | 95.5044
- | |
- .5 | 730.6167 | 95.8186
- .6 | 735.4154 | 96.1327
- .7 | 740.2299 | 96.4469
- .8 | 745.0601 | 96.7611
- .9 | 749.9060 | 97.0752
- | |
- 31.0 | 754.7676 | 97.3894
- .1 | 759.6450 | 97.7035
- .2 | 761.5380 | 98.0177
- .3 | 769.4467 | 98.3319
- .4 | 774.3712 | 98.6460
- | |
- .5 | 779.3113 | 98.9602
- .6 | 784.2672 | 99.2743
- .7 | 789.2388 | 99.5885
- .8 | 794.2260 | 99.9026
- .9 | 799.2290 |100.2168
- | |
- 32.0 | 804.2477 |100.5310
- .1 | 809.2821 |100.8451
- .2 | 814.3322 |101.1593
- .3 | 819.3980 |101.4734
- .4 | 824.4796 |101.7876
- | |
- .5 | 829.5768 |102.1018
- .6 | 834.6898 |102.4159
- .7 | 839.8185 |102.7301
- .8 | 844.9628 |103.0442
- .9 | 850.1229 |103.3584
- | |
- 33.0 | 855.2986 |103.6726
- .1 | 860.4902 |103.9867
- .2 | 865.6973 |104.3009
- .3 | 870.9202 |104.6150
- .4 | 876.1588 |104.9292
- | |
- .5 | 881.4131 |105.2434
- .6 | 886.6831 |105.5575
- .7 | 891.9688 |105.8717
- .8 | 897.2703 |106.1858
- .9 | 902.5874 |106.5000
- | |
- 34.0 | 907.9203 |106.8142
- .1 | 913.2688 |107.1283
- .2 | 918.6331 |107.4425
- .3 | 924.0131 |107.7566
- .4 | 929.4088 |108.0708
- | |
- .5 | 934.8202 |108.3849
- .6 | 940.2473 |108.6991
- .7 | 945.6901 |109.0133
- .8 | 951.1486 |109.3274
- .9 | 956.6228 |109.6416
- | |
- 35.0 | 962.1128 |109.9557
- .1 | 967.6184 |110.2699
- .2 | 973.1397 |110.5841
- .3 | 978.6768 |110.8982
- .4 | 984.2296 |111.2124
- | |
- .5 | 989.7980 |111.5265
- .6 | 995.3822 |111.8407
- .7 |1000.9821 |112.1549
- .8 |1006.5977 |112.4690
- .9 |1012.2290 |112.7832
- | |
- 36.0 |1017.8760 |113.0973
- .1 |1023.5387 |113.4115
- .2 |1029.2172 |113.7257
- .3 |1034.9113 |114.0398
- .4 |1040.6212 |114.3540
- | |
- .5 |1046.3467 |114.6681
- .6 |1052.0880 |114.9823
- .7 |1057.8449 |115.2965
- .8 |1063.6176 |115.6106
- .9 |1069.4060 |115.9248
- | |
- 37.0 |1075.2101 |116.2389
- .1 |1081.0299 |116.5531
- .2 |1086.8654 |116.8672
- .3 |1093.7166 |117.1814
- .4 |1098.5835 |117.4956
- | |
- .5 |1104.4662 |117.8097
- .6 |1110.3645 |118.1239
- .7 |1116.2786 |118.4380
- .8 |1122.2083 |118.7522
- .9 |1128.1538 |119.0664
- | |
- 38.0 |1134.1149 |119.3805
- .1 |1140.0918 |119.6947
- .2 |1146.0844 |120.0088
- .3 |1152.0927 |120.3230
- .4 |1158.1167 |120.6372
- | |
- .5 |1164.1564 |120.9513
- .6 |1170.2118 |121.2655
- .7 |1176.2830 |121.5796
- .8 |1182.3698 |121.8938
- .9 |1188.4724 |122.2080
- | |
- 39.0 |1194.5906 |122.5221
- .1 |1200.7246 |122.8363
- .2 |1206.8742 |123.1504
- .3 |1213.0396 |123.4646
- .4 |1219.2207 |123.7788
- | |
- .5 |1225.4175 |124.0929
- .6 |1231.6300 |124.4071
- .7 |1237.8582 |124.7212
- .8 |1244.1021 |125.0354
- .9 |1250.3617 |125.3495
- | |
- 40.0 |1256.6371 |125.6637
- .1 |1262.9281 |125.9779
- .2 |1269.2348 |126.2920
- .3 |1275.5573 |126.6062
- .4 |1281.8955 |126.9203
- | |
- .5 |1288.2493 |127.2345
- .6 |1294.3189 |127.5487
- .7 |1301.0042 |127.8628
- .8 |1307.4052 |128.1770
- .9 |1313.8219 |128.4911
- | |
- 41.0 |1320.2543 |128.8053
- .1 |1326.7024 |129.1195
- .2 |1333.1663 |129.4336
- .3 |1339.6458 |129.7478
- .4 |1346.1410 |130.0619
- | |
- .5 |1352.6520 |130.3761
- .6 |1359.1786 |130.6903
- .7 |1365.7210 |131.0044
- .8 |1372.2791 |131.3186
- .9 |1378.8529 |131.6227
- | |
- 42.0 |1385.4424 |131.9469
- .1 |1392.0476 |132.2611
- .2 |1398.6685 |132.5752
- .3 |1405.3051 |132.8894
- .4 |1411.9574 |133.2035
- | |
- .5 |1418.6254 |133.5177
- .6 |1425.3092 |133.8318
- .7 |1432.0086 |134.1460
- .8 |1438.7238 |134.4602
- .9 |1445.4546 |134.7743
- | |
- 43.0 |1452.2012 |135.0885
- .1 |1458.9635 |135.4026
- .2 |1465.7415 |135.7168
- .3 |1472.5352 |136.0310
- .4 |1479.3446 |136.3451
- | |
- .5 |1486.1697 |136.6593
- .6 |1493.0105 |136.9734
- .7 |1499.8670 |137.2876
- .8 |1506.7393 |137.6018
- .9 |1513.6272 |137.9159
- | |
- 44.0 |1520.5308 |138.2301
- .1 |1527.4502 |138.5442
- .2 |1534.3853 |138.8584
- .3 |1541.3360 |139.1726
- .4 |1548.3025 |139.4867
- | |
- .5 |1555.2847 |139.8009
- .6 |1562.2826 |140.1153
- .7 |1569.2063 |140.4292
- .8 |1576.3255 |140.7434
- .9 |1583.3706 |141.0575
- | |
- 45.0 |1590.4313 |141.3717
- .1 |1597.5077 |141.6858
- .2 |1604.5999 |142.0000
- .3 |1611.7077 |142.3142
- .4 |1618.8313 |142.6283
- | |
- .5 |1625.9705 |142.9425
- .6 |1633.1255 |143.2566
- .7 |1640.2962 |143.5708
- .8 |1647.4826 |143.8849
- .9 |1654.6847 |144.1991
- | |
- 46.0 |1661.9025 |144.5133
- .1 |1669.1360 |144.8274
- .2 |1676.3853 |145.1416
- .3 |1683.6502 |145.4557
- .4 |1690.9308 |145.7699
- | |
- .5 |1698.2272 |146.0841
- .6 |1705.5392 |146.3982
- .7 |1712.8670 |146.7124
- .8 |1720.2105 |147.0265
- .9 |1727.5697 |147.3407
- | |
- 47.0 |1734.9445 |147.6550
- .1 |1742.3351 |147.9690
- .2 |1749.7414 |148.2832
- .3 |1757.1635 |148.5973
- .4 |1764.6012 |148.9115
- | |
- .5 |1772.0546 |149.2257
- .6 |1779.5237 |149.5398
- .7 |1787.0086 |149.8540
- .8 |1794.5091 |150.1681
- .9 |1802.0254 |150.4823
- | |
- 48.0 |1809.5574 |150.7964
- .1 |1817.1050 |151.1105
- .2 |1824.6684 |151.4248
- .3 |1832.2475 |151.7389
- .4 |1839.8423 |152.0531
- | |
- .5 |1847.4528 |152.3672
- .6 |1855.0790 |152.6814
- .7 |1862.7210 |152.9956
- .8 |1870.3786 |153.3097
- .9 |1878.0519 |153.6239
- | |
- 49.0 |1885.7409 |153.9380
- .1 |1893.4457 |154.2522
- .2 |1901.1662 |154.5664
- .3 |1908.9024 |154.8805
- .4 |1916.6543 |155.1947
- | |
- .5 |1924.4218 |155.5088
- .6 |1932.2051 |155.8230
- .7 |1940.0042 |156.1372
- .8 |1947.8189 |156.4513
- .9 |1955.6493 |156.7655
- | |
- 50.0 |1963.4954 |157.0796
- .1 |1971.3572 |157.3938
- .2 |1979.2348 |157.7080
- .3 |1987.1280 |158.0221
- .4 |1995.0370 |158.3363
- | |
- .5 |2002.9617 |158.6504
- .6 |2010.9020 |158.9646
- .7 |2018.8581 |159.2787
- .8 |2026.8299 |159.5929
- .9 |2034.8174 |159.9071
- | |
- 51.0 |2042.6206 |160.2212
- .1 |2050.8895 |160.5354
- .2 |2058.8742 |160.8495
- .3 |2066.9245 |161.1637
- .4 |2074.9905 |161.4779
- | |
- .5 |2083.0723 |161.7920
- .6 |2091.1697 |162.1062
- .7 |2099.2829 |162.4203
- .8 |2107.4118 |162.7345
- .9 |2115.5563 |163.0487
- | |
- 52.0 |2123.7166 |163.3628
- .1 |2131.8926 |163.6770
- .2 |2140.0843 |163.9911
- .3 |2148.2917 |164.3053
- .4 |2156.5149 |164.6195
- | |
- .5 |2164.7537 |164.9336
- .6 |2173.0082 |165.2479
- .7 |2181.2785 |165.5619
- .8 |2189.5644 |165.8761
- .9 |2197.8661 |166.1903
- | |
- 53.0 |2206.1834 |166.5044
- .1 |2214.5165 |166.8186
- .2 |2222.8653 |167.1327
- .3 |2231.2298 |167.4469
- .4 |2239.6100 |167.7610
- | |
- .5 |2248.0059 |168.0752
- .6 |2256.4175 |168.3894
- .7 |2264.8448 |168.7035
- .8 |2273.2879 |169.0177
- .9 |2281.7466 |169.3318
- | |
- 54.0 |2290.2210 |169.6460
- .1 |2298.7112 |169.9602
- .2 |2307.2171 |170.2743
- .3 |2315.7386 |170.5885
- .4 |2324.2759 |170.9026
- | |
- .5 |2332.8289 |171.2168
- .6 |2341.3976 |171.5310
- .7 |2349.9820 |171.8451
- .8 |2358.5821 |172.1593
- .9 |2367.1979 |172.4735
- | |
- 55.0 |2375.8294 |172.7876
- .1 |2384.4767 |173.1017
- .2 |2393.1396 |173.4159
- .3 |2401.8183 |173.7301
- .4 |2410.5126 |174.0442
- | |
- .5 |2419.2227 |174.3584
- .6 |2427.9485 |174.6726
- .7 |2436.6899 |174.9867
- .8 |2145.4471 |175.3009
- .9 |2454.2200 |175.6150
- -----+-----------+--------
-
-
-UNITED STATES STANDARD SIZES OF WROUGHT IRON WELDED PIPE.
-
- ------+-------+------+------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
- | | | | | | | |
- | | | | | | Length | Length |
- | | | | | | of pipe| of pipe|
- | | | | | | per | per |
- Inside| Actual| |Actual| | | square | square |
- diam-|outside| |Inside|External|Internal| foot of| foot of|
- eter | Diam- |Thick-| Diam-| circum-| circum-| outside| inside |
- nom. | eter. | ness.| eter.|ference.|ference.|surface.|surface.|
- ------+-------+------+------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
- ¹⁄₈ | .405| .068 | 0.269| 1.272 | 0.848 | 9.440 | 14.15 |
- ¹⁄₄ | .54 | .088 | 0.364| 1.696 | 1.144 | 7.075 | 10.50 |
- ³⁄₈ | .675| .091 | 0.493| 2.121 | 1.552 | 5.657 | 7.67 |
- ¹⁄₂ | .840| .109 | 0.622| 2.652 | 1.957 | 4.502 | 6.13 |
- ³⁄₄ | 1.050| .113 | 0.824| 3.299 | 2.589 | 3.637 | 4.635 |
- 1 | 1.315| .134 | 1.047| 4.134 | 3.292 | 2.903 | 3.679 |
- 1¹⁄₄ | 1.660| .140 | 1.38 | 5.215 | 4.335 | 2.301 | 2.768 |
- 1¹⁄₂ | 1.90 | .145 | 1.61 | 5.969 | 5.061 | 2.010 | 2.371 |
- 2 | 2.375| .154 | 2.067| 7.461 | 6.494 | 1.611 | 1.848 |
- 2¹⁄₂ | 2.875| .204 | 2.467| 9.032 | 7.754 | 1.328 | 1.547 |
- 3 | 3.50 | .217 | 3.066| 10.996 | 9.636 | 1.091 | 1.245 |
- 3¹⁄₂ | 4.0 | .226 | 3.548| 12.566 | 11.146 | .955 | 1.077 |
- 4 | 4.50 | .237 | 4.026| 14.137 | 12.648 | .849 | 0.949 |
- 4¹⁄₂ | 5.0 | .247 | 4.506| 15.708 | 14.153 | .765 | 0.848 |
- 5 | 5.563| .259 | 5.045| 17.475 | 15.849 | .629 | 0.757 |
- 6 | 6.625| .280 | 5.065| 20.813 | 19.054 | .577 | 0.630 |
- 7 | 7.625| .301 | 7.023| 23.954 | 22.063 | .505 | 0.544 |
- 8 | 8.625| .322 | 7.981| 27.096 | 25.076 | .444 | 0.478 |
- 9 | 9.688| .344 | 9.00 | 30.433 | 28.277 | .394 | 0.425 |
- 10 | 10.750| .366 |10.018| 33.772 | 31.475 | .355 | 0.381 |
- ------+-------+------+------+--------+--------+--------+--------+
-
- ------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+------
- | | | | | |
- | | | Length| | |
- | | |of pipe| | |
- | | | con- | Weight|No. of |
- Inside| | Actual|taining| per |threads|Length
- diam-| Ex- | in- | one | foot | per | per-
- eter |ternal| ternal| cubic | of |Inch of| fect
- nom. | area.| area. | foot. |length.| screw.|screw.
- ------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+------
- ¹⁄₈ | .129| .0572|2500. | .243| 27 | 0.19
- ¹⁄₄ | .229| .1041|1385. | .422| 18 | 0.29
- ³⁄₈ | .358| .1916| 751.5 | .561| 18 | 0.30
- ¹⁄₂ | .554| .3048| 472.4 | .845| 14 | 0.39
- ³⁄₄ | .866| .5333| 270.0 | 1.126| 14 | 0.40
- 1 | 1.357| .8627| 166.9 | 1.670| 11¹⁄₂ | 0.51
- 1¹⁄₄ | 2.164| 1.496 | 96.25| 2.258| 11¹⁄₂ | 0.54
- 1¹⁄₂ | 2.835| 2.038 | 70.65| 2.694| 11¹⁄₂ | 0.55
- 2 | 4.430| 3.355 | 42.36| 3.667| 11¹⁄₂ | 0.58
- 2¹⁄₂ | 6.491| 4.783 | 30.11| 5.773| 8 | 0.89
- 3 | 9.621| 7.388 | 19.40| 7.547| 8 | 0.95
- 3¹⁄₂ |12.566| 9.837 | 14.56| 9.055| 8 | 1.00
- 4 |15.901|12.730 | 11.31| 10.728| 8 | 1.05
- 4¹⁄₂ |19.635|15.939 | 9.03| 12.492| 8 | 1.10
- 5 |24.299|19.990 | 7.20| 14.564| 8 | 1.16
- 6 |34.471|28.889 | 4.98| 18.767| 8 | 1.26
- 7 |45.663|38.737 | 3.72| 23.410| 8 | 1.36
- 8 |58.426|50.039 | 2.88| 28.348| 8 | 1.46
- 9 |73.715|63.633 | 2.26| 34.677| 8 | 1.57
- 10 |90.762|78.838 | 1.80| 40.641| 8 | 1.68
- ------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+------
-
-Thread taper three-fourths inch to one foot.
-
-All pipe below 1¹⁄₂ inches is butt-welded, and proved to 300 pounds per
-square inch; 1¹⁄₂ inch and above is lap-welded and proved to 500 pounds
-per square inch.
-
-
-STANDARDS FOR WIRE GAUGES IN USE IN THE UNITED STATES.
-
-Dimensions of Sizes in Decimal Parts of an Inch.
-
- ------+--------+--------+---------+------+------+----------+------
- | | | Washburn| | | |
- Number|American|Birming-| & Moen | Impe-| | U. S. |Number
- of |or Brown| ham, or|Mfg. Co.,| rial |Stubs’| Stand. | of
- Wire | & | Stubs’ | Worces- | Wire | Steel| for | Wire
- Gauge.| Sharpe.| Wire. | ter, Ms.|Gauge.| Wire.| Plate. |Gauge.
- ------+--------+--------+---------+------+------+----------+------
- 000000| .... | .... | .... | .464 | .... |.46875 |000000
- 00000| .... | .... | .... | .432 | .... |.4375 | 00000
- 0000| .46 | .454 | .3938 | .400 | .... |.40625 | 0000
- 000| .40964 | .425 | .3625 | .372 | .... |.375 | 000
- 00| .3648 | .38 | .3310 | .348 | .... |.34375 | 00
- 0| .32486 | .34 | .3065 | .324 | .... |.3125 | 0
- 1| .2893 | .3 | .2830 | .300 | .227 |.28125 | 1
- 2| .25763 | .284 | .2625 | .276 | .219 |.265625 | 2
- 3| .22942 | .259 | .2437 | .252 | .212 |.25 | 3
- 4| .20431 | .238 | .2253 | .232 | .207 |.234375 | 4
- 5| .18194 | .22 | .2070 | .212 | .204 |.21875 | 5
- 6| .16202 | .203 | .1920 | .192 | .201 |.203125 | 6
- 7| .14428 | .18 | .1770 | .176 | .199 |.1875 | 7
- 8| .12849 | .165 | .1620 | .160 | .197 |.171875 | 8
- 9| .11443 | .148 | .1483 | .144 | .194 |.15625 | 9
- 10| .10189 | .134 | .1350 | .128 | .191 |.140625 | 10
- 11| .090742| .12 | .1205 | .116 | .188 |.125 | 11
- 12| .080808| .109 | .1055 | .104 | .185 |.109375 | 12
- 13| .071961| .095 | .0915 | .092 | .182 |.09375 | 13
- 14| .064084| .083 | .0800 | .080 | .180 |.078125 | 14
- 15| .057068| .072 | .0720 | .072 | .178 |.0703125 | 15
- 16| .05082 | .065 | .0625 | .064 | .175 |.0625 | 16
- 17| .045257| .058 | .0540 | .056 | .172 |.05625 | 17
- 18| .040303| .049 | .0475 | .048 | .168 |.05 | 18
- 19| .03589 | .042 | .0410 | .040 | .164 |.04375 | 19
- 20| .031961| .035 | .0348 | .036 | .161 |.0375 | 20
- 21| .028462| .032 | .03175 | .032 | .157 |.034375 | 21
- 22| .025347| .028 | .0286 | .028 | .155 |.03125 | 22
- 23| .022571| .025 | .0258 | .024 | .153 |.028125 | 23
- 24| .0201 | .022 | .0230 | .022 | .151 |.025 | 24
- 25| .0179 | .02 | .0204 | .020 | .148 |.021875 | 25
- 26| .01594 | .018 | .0181 | .018 | .146 |.01875 | 26
- 27| .014195| .016 | .0173 | .0164| .143 |.0171875 | 27
- 28| .012641| .014 | .0162 | .0149| .139 |.015625 | 28
- 29| .011257| .013 | .0150 | .0136| .134 |.0140625 | 29
- 30| .010025| .012 | .0140 | .0124| .127 |.0125 | 30
- 31| .008928| .01 | .0132 | .0116| .120 |.0109375 | 31
- 32| .00795 | .009 | .0128 | .0108| .115 |.01015625 | 32
- 33| .00708 | .008 | .0118 | .0100| .112 |.009375 | 33
- 34| .006304| .007 | .0104 | .0092| .110 |.00859375 | 34
- 35| .005614| .005 | .0095 | .0084| .108 |.0078125 | 35
- 36| .005 | .004 | .0090 | .0076| .106 |.00703125 | 36
- 37| .004453| .... | .... | .0068| .103 |.006640625| 37
- 38| .003965| .... | .... | .0060| .101 |.00625 | 38
- 39| .003531| .... | .... | .0052| .099 | .... | 39
- 40| .003144| .... | .... | .0048| .097 | .... | 40
- ------+--------+--------+---------+------+------+----------+------
-
-
-UNITED STATES STANDARD SIZES OF BOLTS.
-
- +------+--------+--------+--------+
- | |DISTANCE| | |
- | | ACROSS |DISTANCE| |
- | | FLATS, | ACROSS | THICK- |
- | DIAM-| SQUARE |CORNERS,| NESS |
- | ETER.|AND HEX.| HEX. |OF HEAD.|
- +------+--------+--------+--------+
- | ¹⁄₄″| ¹⁄₂″ | ⁹⁄₁₆″ | ¹⁄₄″ |
- | ³⁄₈ | ¹¹⁄₁₆ | ²⁵⁄₃₂ | ¹¹⁄₃₂ |
- | ¹⁄₂ | ⁷⁄₈ | 1 | ⁷⁄₁₆ |
- | ⁵⁄₈ | 1¹⁄₁₆ | 1⁷⁄₃₂ | ¹⁷⁄₃₂ |
- | ³⁄₄ | 1¹⁄₄ | 1⁷⁄₁₆ | ⁵⁄₈ |
- | ⁷⁄₈ | 1⁷⁄₁₆ | 1²¹⁄₃₂ | ²¹⁄₃₂ |
- | 1 | 1⁵⁄₈ | 1⁷⁄₈ | ¹³⁄₁₆ |
- | 1¹⁄₈ | 1¹³⁄₁₆ | 2³⁄₃₂ | ²⁹⁄₃₂ |
- | 1¹⁄₄ | 2 | 2⁵⁄₁₆ | 1 |
- | 1³⁄₈ | 2³⁄₁₆ | 2¹⁄₂ | 1³⁄₃₂ |
- | 1¹⁄₂ | 2³⁄₈ | 2³⁄₄ | 1³⁄₁₆ |
- | 1⁵⁄₈ | 2⁹⁄₁₆ | 2¹⁵⁄₁₆ | 1⁹⁄₃₂ |
- | 1³⁄₄ | 2³⁄₄ | 3³⁄₁₆ | 1³⁄₈ |
- | 1⁷⁄₈ | 2¹⁵⁄₁₆ | 3¹³⁄₃₂ | 1¹⁵⁄₃₂ |
- | 2 | 3¹⁄₈ | 3⁵⁄₈ | 1⁹⁄₁₆ |
- | 2¹⁄₄ | 3¹⁄₂ | 4¹⁄₁₆ | 1³⁄₄ |
- | 2¹⁄₂ | 3⁷⁄₈ | 4¹⁄₂ | 1¹⁵⁄₁₆ |
- | 2³⁄₄ | 4¹⁄₄ | 4⁷⁄₈ | 2¹⁄₈ |
- | 3 | 4⁵⁄₈ | 5¹¹⁄₃₂ | 2⁵⁄₁₆ |
- +------+--------+--------+--------+
-
-
-UNITED STATES STANDARD SCREW THREAD GAUGE.
-
-[Illustration: Fig. 316.]
-
-
-
-
-Some Things Personal.
-
-
-In the preparation of this work the idea of self-help has never been
-forgotten; nothing has been held back or omitted which would, in the
-author’s opinion, tend to advance the student in the draughtsman’s art.
-
-The volume contains the experience in practical drawing, as related to
-engineering and mechanics, of over one hundred years, i. e., the
-author’s, Mr. Perrott’s and Mr. Lucas’ experiences added together exceed
-that period.
-
-Hence, the work should be really helpful; it has been aimed also to be
-entertaining and with easy tasks; all the illustrations of the book are
-recommended as models for practice--they have been selected with that
-view.
-
-Moreover, as between author and publishers, the latter have agreed to
-issue the work in the most thorough style possible--as to paper,
-printing and binding--and to sell it at a very generously low price,
-considering all things.
-
-With the closing words “hail and farewell,” the author bids adieu (God
-be with you) to the reader and the student.
-
-[Illustration: BEACON LIGHT.]
-
-
-
-
- Self
- Hawkins’ Mechanical Drawing.
- Help
-
-Index.
-
-
- PAGE
-
- =Acute Angle=, def. 42
-
- =Acute-Angled Triangle=, def. 50
-
- =Addendum Circle=, illus. 200
-
- =Alphabets=, Gothic, desc. 171
-
- =Altitude=, def. 41
-
- =Altitude of a Polygon=, def. 47
-
- =American Machinist=, Quotation from 141
-
- =Angle=, def. 41, 83
- To bisect an 89
- To draw an 89
-
- =Angle-Iron=, illus. 75
-
- =Angle-Plate=, illus. 75
-
- =Angular Perspective Drawing=, illus. 260, 265
-
- =Apex=, def. 42
-
- =Apex of an Angle=, def. 42
-
- =Arc=, def. 42
- Complement of an 99
- Cosecant of an 99
- Cotangent of an 99
- Sine of an 99
- Supplement of an 99
- Tangent of an 99
- Versed Sine of an 99
-
- =Arc of Circle=, To find the center of an 90
-
- =Arcs=, Drawing 146
- Illus. 146
-
- =Arrow-Heads=, how made 172, 176
-
- =Axiom=, def. 83
-
- =Axis=, Conjugate, def. 96
- Of a Figure, def. 43
- Of a Solid, def. 42
- Transverse, def. 96
-
-
- =Backlash in Gearing= 215
-
- =Backward Projection= desc. 152, illus. 152-3
-
- =Base=, def. 43
- Of a Polygon, def. 47
-
- =Beacon Light=, illus. 282
-
- =Beam Compasses= desc. 124, illus. 124
-
- =Bending Machine=, Hydraulic desc. 221, illus. 220-1
-
- =Benjamin, Prof. Chas.=, “How and What to Study” 23
-
- =Bevel-Gear=, desc. 201
-
- =Bevel Mortise Wheel=, desc. 203
-
- =Bevel Wheel= desc. 199, illus. 203
-
- =Bisect=, def. 43
-
- =Bisector=, def. 43
-
- =Blackboard=, illus. and desc. 27
-
- =Blackboard Drawing= 28
-
- =Blue Printing= desc. 186, illus. 187
- Test pieces 188
-
- =Blue Prints=, Office rules for 196
-
- =Black Process Copying= 188
-
- =Boiler-Plate=, Riveted, illus. 76
-
- =Bolt=, Square-head, illus. 76
-
- =Bolt and Nut=, Square-head desc. 144, illus. 145
- Hexagon desc. 144, illus. 76, 144
-
- =Bow-Dividers= desc. 123, illus. 122
-
- =Bow-Pencil=, desc. 123
-
- =Bows=, Use of 242
-
- =Brick=, Section Lining, illus. 182
-
- =Broken Lines=, How to Draw 33
- Def. 46
-
- =Bumping Post=, illus. 226
-
-
- =Calipers=, illus. vi
-
- =Cast-Iron=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
- =Caulking Tool=, illus. 76
-
- =Center Line=, def. 46
-
- =Center Lines=, In Drawings 240-1
- In Shop Drawings 192
-
- =Chalk-Crayon= desc. 27, illus. 27, 37
-
- =Chalk-Work= 27
- Instruments for Drawing, illus. 29
-
- =Channel-Iron=, illus. 75
-
- =Checking Drawings= 194
-
- =Circle=, def. 43
- To describe about a square 93
- about a triangle 93
- through two points 90
- through three points 90
- To find the center 90
- To inscribe in a square 94
- in a triangle 94
-
- =Circles=, Drawing desc. 146, illus. 146
-
- =Circumference of a Circle= 43
-
- =Circumscribe=, def. 43
-
- =Circular Pitch Line=, illus. 200
-
- =Classifying Drawings=, Office Rules for 191
-
- =Clearance in Wheel Teeth= 215
-
- =Cog-Wheel= def. 201, illus. 201
- Section Lining, illus. 183
-
- =Coin=, Perspective View of a, illus. 248
-
- =Color and Tints= 185
-
- =Compass=, Mariners’, illus. 268
-
- =Compasses=, Beam, desc. and illus. 124
- Desc. and illus. 121
- For holding chalk, illus. 29
- How to hold, illus. 136
-
- =Complement of an Arc= 99
-
- =Composition=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
- =Concave=, def. 44
-
- =Cone=, def. 44
-
- =Conjugate Axis=, def. 96
-
- =Construction=, def. 44
- Line, def. 46
-
- =Contents=, Table of 24
-
- =Contour=, def. 44
-
- =Convergence=, def. 44
-
- =Convex=, def. 44
-
- =Copying Drawings=, Black Process 188
- Blue Printing 186
- Tracing 184
-
- =Copyright= viii
-
- =Corner=, def. 44
-
- =Corollary=, def. 83
-
- =Co-secant of an Arc=, def. 99
-
- =Co-sine of an Arc=, def. 99
-
- =Co-tangent of an Arc=, def. 99
-
- =Crane=, desc. 219
- Working drawing of, illus. 218
-
- =Cross-Hatches=, def. 44
-
- =Cross-hatching Drawings= 182
-
- =Crown Wheel=, illus. 208
-
- =Curve=, def. 44
-
- =Curved Line=, def. 46
-
- =Curved Lines=, Drawing, desc. 69
- Drawing Figures of 70, 72, 73
- How to Draw 35
- Illus. 70
-
- =Curved Surface=, def. 49
-
- =Curve or Scroll=, illus. 117
-
- =Cut Gears=, desc. 215
-
- =Cylinder=, def. 44
-
- =Cylindrical=, def. 44
-
- =Cylindrical Projection=, illus. 161
-
-
- =Dash Line=, def. 46
-
- =Decimal Equivalents=, Table of 269
-
- =Dedication= ix
-
- =Definitions=, Preliminary 41
-
- =Degree=, def. 41, 44
-
- =Describe=, def. 44
-
- =Design=, def. 44
- Symmetry in, def. 50
-
- =Designing Gears= 209
-
- =Detail Drawings=, Office Rules for 191
-
- =Develop=, def. 45
-
- =Diagonal=, def. 45
-
- =Diagonals of a Polygon=, def. 47
-
- =Diameter=, def. 45
-
- =Diameter=, Of a Circle 43
-
- =Diameters of Wheels=, How to Measure 199
-
- =Diametral Pitch=, desc. 200
- Of Gears 212
-
- =Dimensioning Drawings= desc. 176, illus. 177, 179
-
- =Dimension Line=, def. 46
-
- =Dimensions on Drawings=, Office Rules for 192
-
- =Dividers and Compasses=, desc. 119
-
- =Dividers=, illus. 82, 119
- Bisecting, desc. 119
- Bow, illus. 122
- “Point” 242
- Proportional desc. 119, illus. 120
- Spring Bow, desc. 124
-
- =Dodecahedron=, def. 48
-
- =Dot-and-Dash Line=, def. 46
-
- =Dotted Line=, def. 46
-
- =Draughtsmen=, Useful Tables for 269-280
-
- =Drawing=, Blackboard 28
- Free hand 55
- Linear Perspective 247
- Parallel Perspective 260-1
- Projection, desc. 148
- Scale Perspective 257
- Spur Gear, illus. 163, 211
- Spur Wheel, desc. 162
- Straight Line Figures desc. 65, illus. 66-7-8
- Symbols 193
- The Pitch Line 209
- To Scale, desc. 126
- Working, def. 51
-
- =Drawing-Board= desc. 107, illus. 102, 106, 108
- Expansion and Contraction of 108
- How to Construct 107
- Trestles, illus. 110, 111
-
- =Drawing Instruments=, desc. 103
- How to Select 104
- Illus. 105
- Outfit Recommended 104
-
- =Drawing Materials=, desc. 103
-
- =Drawing Office Rules= 191
-
- =Drawing Paper=, desc. 132
- Erasing Lines 140
- Fixing of, illus. 102
- Fixing on the Board 139
- Pasting 184
- “Points” 243
- Patent Office Sizes 234
- Sizes of 133
-
- =Drawing Pencils=, desc. and illus. 118
- How to Use 56
-
- =Drawing Pen=, Filling with ink, illus. 130
-
- =Drawing Pens=, desc. and illus. 129
-
- =Drawing-Pins=, desc. 110
-
- =Drawing Scales=, desc. 126
-
- =Drawings=, Cleaning, desc. 169
- Color and Finish, note 185
- Dimensioning, desc. 176
- Inking in, desc. 167
- Lettering, desc. 171
- Patent Office Rules for 233
- Reproducing 186
- Section-Lining, desc. 182
- Shading desc. 180, illus. 180, 225
- Size of, Office Rules 191
- Tint and Color, desc. 184
-
- =Drawing-Table=, desc. 111
- Folding Legs, illus. 104
-
-
- =Edge=, def. 45
-
- =Elevation=, def. 45
-
- =Elevation and Section=, Spur Wheel desc. 216, illus. 212
-
- =Ellipse, An=, desc. 96, 118
- To describe when length and breadth are given 96
-
- =Envelopes=, Portfolio, desc. 142
-
- =Equiangular Triangle=, def. 45
-
- =Equilateral Triangle=, def. 50
-
- =Erasing=, “Points” on 242
-
- =Eye=, illus. and desc. 253
- Effect of Light on 253
-
-
- =Face=, def. 45
-
- =Faced Surfaces=, Points, etc. 242
-
- =Figures=, Drawing Straight-line 65
- Numerals, examples of 173
- Straight-line, illus. 66
-
- =File Handle=, desc. and illus. 144
-
- =Finger and Thumb Lines=, illus. 64
-
- =Finished Surfaces=, How to indicate 193
- “Points” 242
-
- =Finishing=, def. 45
-
- =Flanged-tooth Wheel=, desc. 205
-
- =Flat Pattern=, def. 47
-
- =Foreshortening=, def. 45
-
- =Forward Projection= desc. 151, 152, illus. 155
-
- =Free-hand=, def. 45
-
- =Free-hand Drawing= 55, 78
- First Lesson in 30
- Penciling, illus. 54
-
- =Free-hand Illustration=, a Water Wheel 78
-
- =Friction-Clutch and Pulley=, desc. 224
-
- =Friction Gear-Wheels=, desc. 201
-
- =Full Line=, def. 46
-
-
- =Gear=, def. 199
-
- =Gearing=, desc. 199
- Drawing desc. 162, illus. 163
-
- =Gearing and Design= 197
-
- =Gears=, A Train of, desc. 208
- Speed of 208
-
- =Gear-Wheels=, Spur, illus. 198
-
- =Generated=, def. 45
-
- =Geometric=, def. 45
-
- =Geometrical Axioms= 84
-
- =Geometrical Drawing=, desc. 81
- Problems in 86
-
- =Geometrical Signs= 84
-
- =Geometry=, defs. 249
- Elements of 81
-
- =Gothic Letters=, illus. 173
-
- =Grooved Friction Wheels=, desc. 201
-
- =Ground-Plane= def. 249, 255, illus. 249
-
-
- =Half-Tint=, def. 45
-
- =Hand-Wheel=, illus. 77
-
- =Hanger=, illus. 179
-
- =Helical Wheel= desc. 199, illus. 207
-
- =Hemisphere=, def. 45
-
- =Heptagon=, def. 47
-
- =Hexagon=, def. 47
- To Construct a 95
-
- =Hexagon-Head Bolt=, illus. 144
-
- =Hexahedron=, def. 48
-
- =Horizontal=, def. 45, 250
-
- =Horizontal Line=, in Drawing, illus. 250
- How to Draw 32
- In Perspective 252
-
- =Hypothesis=, def. 83
-
-
- =Icosahedron=, def. 48
-
- =India Ink=, desc. and illus. 131
- Dish or Tile, illus. 131
-
- =India Rubber Eraser=, illus. 132
- Use of 240
-
- =Ink=, Preparing, for Drawings, desc. 167
- Test for Good, desc. 167
-
- =Ink Eraser=, Steel, desc. and illus. 132
-
- =Inking=, illus. 166, 169
- Long Lines, illus. 170
- Rules of Procedure 168
- Short Work, illus. 169
-
- “=Inking in=” Drawings, desc. 167
- “Points,” etc. 239, 243
- Patent Office Drawings 234
-
- =Inscribe=, def. 45
-
- =Instrumental=, def. 45
-
- =Instruments= for Chalk-work, illus. 29
-
- =Internal Gear=, desc. 201
-
- =Internal-Gear Wheel=, illus. 207
-
- =Introduction= 15
-
- =Isosceles Triangle=, def. 50
-
-
- =Lantern-Wheel=, desc. 201
-
- =Lathe-Dog=, illus. 76
-
- =Lemma=, def. 83
-
- =Lettering=, Blow-Off Valve, illus. 175
- Drawings, desc. 171
-
- =Light=, and Sense of Seeing 254
- Experiment with, illus. 255
- Laws of 252
-
- =Line=, def. 82
- To Divide into Equal Parts 89
-
- =Linear Perspective Drawing= 247
-
- =Lines=, def. 45
- Note 65
- Parallel, def. 83
-
- =Link Motion=, Stephenson’s, illus. 225
-
- =Longitudinal=, def. 46
-
- =Lucas, Theo.=, Acknowledgement 23, 266
-
-
- =Marking Measurements= on Drawings 243
-
- =Mechanical Drawing= 137, 247
- Elevation 138
- Examples 143
- Procedure 141
-
- =Minerva=, Free-hand Sketch of iii
-
- =Miter-Wheel= desc. 199, 204, illus. 204
-
- =Model=, def. 46
-
-
- =Nonagon=, def. 47
-
- =Numbering= Drawings, Office Rules for 194-5
-
- =Numerals=, illus. 173
-
-
- =Oblique=, def. 46
-
- =Oblique Lines= How to Draw, 32, 58, illus. 59, 63
-
- =Oblong=, def. 46
-
- =Obtuse Angle=, def. 42
-
- =Obtuse-Angled Triangle=, def. 50
-
- =Octahedron=, def. 48
-
- =Octagon=, def. 47
- To Describe on a given straight line 95
- To Inscribe in a circle 96
-
- =Oil Can=, illus. 77
-
- =Optic Nerve=, illus. 253
-
- =Optics=, in Drawing, def. 252
-
- =Outline Picture=, desc. 152
-
- =Oval=, def. 46
- How to Draw an 71
-
- =Overall=, def. 46
-
-
- =Paper=, Fastening Drawing on 184
- Rule or Scale 242
- Sensitized, desc. 188
- The Right Side of 241
-
- =Parallel=, def. 46
-
- =Parallel Lines=, def. 83, 252
- To Draw 88
- In Perspective 251
-
- =Parallel Perspective Drawing=, illus. 260 to 263
-
- =Parallel Rule= desc. 115, illus. 114-5
-
- =Parallelogram=, def. 47
- To Construct 93
-
- =Pasting Drawing Paper=, “Points” 243
-
- =Patent Office Drawings= 235, illus. 236
- Rules of Great Britain 236
- Rules of U. S. 233
-
- =Patterns=, def. 46
- Numbering, from drawings 194
-
- =Pedestal=, illus. 178-9
-
- =Pen=, Hand holding, illus. 166, 169, 170
-
- =Pencil=, Function of a 142
- How to Cut, illus. 57
- How to Hold, illus. 54, 59, 60
- How to Use 56
-
- =Pencil-Compasses=, desc. 143
- How to Hold 143
-
- =Penciling=, desc. and illus. 139
- “Points” 143, 240
-
- =Pencil Lines=, How to Make 119
-
- =Pencils=, Sharpening Points of 143, 241
-
- =Penknife=, illus. 52
-
- =Pens=, Drawing, illus. 129
- Lettering and Figuring, illus. 172
-
- =Pentagon=, def. 47
- To Inscribe in a circle 94
-
- =Perimeter=, def. 47
- Of a Polygon, def. 47
-
- =Periphery of a Wheel=, def. 200
-
- =Perpendicular=, def. 47, 252
-
- =Perpendicular Lines=, How to Draw 31, 61, 62
-
- =Perrott, Geo.=, Acknowledgement 23, 266
-
- =Personal=, Note from the Author 266
-
- =Perspective Drawing= def. 47, illus. 250
- Definitions of Terms used in 249
- Geometrical Terms used in 248
- Of a Bridge, illus. 249
- Scale or Approximate 257
- Vanishing Point, illus. 251
- Water Reflection, illus. 246
-
- =Perspective=, Linear, def. 247
-
- =Perspective Plane=, def. 250
-
- =Picture Plane=, desc. 255
- In Drawing, illus. 249, 250
- In Perspective, illus. 258
-
- =Pinion-Wheel=, desc. 201
-
- =Piston Rod=, desc. 223
-
- =Pitch Circle= in Gearing 200
-
- =Pitch Line=, Drawing the 209
- In Gearing 200
-
- =Plan=, def. 47
-
- =Plan of the Work= 21
-
- =Plane=, in Perspective, def. 249
-
- =Plane of the Picture=, def. 250
-
- =Plane Surface=, def. 49
-
- =Point=, def. 82
-
- =Point of Sight=, in Perspective Drawing 251
-
- =Points=, relating to Chalk Drawings 36
- To be observed in Sketching 141-2
- Useful Hints and 170, 239
-
- =Polygon=, def. 47
-
- =Polyhedron=, def. 48
-
- =Postulate=, def. 83
-
- =Pounce=, How to Use, desc. 170, 186
-
- =Preface= 13
-
- =Preparatory Practice= in Drawing 30
-
- =Prism=, def. 49
-
- =Problems=, def. 83
- Geometrical 86
-
- =Produce=, def. 49
-
- =Profile=, def. 49
-
- =Projection=, Backward, illus. 153-4
- Def. 49
- Cylindrical Outline, desc. 159
- Cylindrical Surface, illus. 161
- Forward desc. 152, illus. 155
- Hexagon Nut, illus. 160
- Marking Dimensions 150
- Lines of Sight 150
- Scaling and Measuring in 149
- Sight-Lines, illus. 151
- Sloping Surface, desc. 159
- Spur-Wheel, desc. 162
-
- =Projection Drawing=, desc. 148
- Illus. 149, 151, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 160, 161, 163
- Principles of 148
- Spur-Wheel, illus. 163, 212
-
- =Proportional Dividers=, illus. 120
-
- =Proportions= of Teeth of Wheels 210
-
- =Proposition=, def. 83
-
- =Protractor=, desc. 128
-
- =Pulley and Friction Clutch=, illus. 224
-
- =Punching Press= illus. 222, desc. 223
-
-
- =Quadrant=, def. 49
-
- =Quadrilateral=, def. 47
-
- =Quadrisect=, def. 49
-
-
- =Rack and Pinion=, desc. 205
-
- =Radius of a Circle= 43
-
- =Reading Working Drawings=, desc. 229
-
- =Rectangle=, def. 48
- To Construct a 92
-
- =Reproducing Drawings=, desc. 186
-
- =Reverse Curve=, def. 44
-
- =Rhomboid=, def. 48
-
- =Rhombus=, def. 48
-
- =Right-Angle=, def. 42
- Triangle, def. 50
-
- =Robinson, A. W., M. E.=, note, Office Rules 191
-
- =Rolling-Circle= in Gear-Wheel 200
-
- =Rule=, Area of a Circle, To find the 271
- Circumference of a Circle, To find the 271
- Cylinder, To find the contents of a 271
- Diameter of a Circle, To find the 271
- Illus. 82
- Inscribed Square, To find side of an 271
- Parallelogram, To find the area of a 271
- Pyramid or Cone, To find the contents of a 271
- Radius of a circle, To find the 271
- Sphere, To find the contents of a 271
- Square, To find the side of an equal 271
- Trapezoid, To find the area of a 271
- Triangle, To find the area of a 271
- Two-foot desc. 127, 128, illus. 128
- Wedge, To find the contents of a 271
-
- =Rules= for Drawing Office 191
- Wheels, To find proportions of 209
-
-
- =Sand Paper=, Removing surface of paper 168
-
- =Scale=, Drawing to, desc. 126
-
- =Scale Drawings=, To read 230
-
- =Scale=, Flat, illus. 127
- Triangular, illus. 127
-
- =Scalene Triangle=, def. 50
-
- =Scale or Approximate Perspective= 257
-
- =Scale Rule=, for Proportions of Teeth 214
-
- =Scales=, Drawing, desc. 126
-
- =Scholium=, def. 83
-
- =Screw-Thread=, U. S. Standard Gauge 280
-
- =Scroll or Curve=, desc. 117
- Universal Curve, illus. 134
-
- =Secant of an Arc= 99
-
- =Section=, def. 49
- Drawing illus. 163, desc. 160
-
- =Sectional=, def. 49
-
- =Section-Liner=, illus. 116
-
- =Section Lines= in Drawings 240
-
- =Section-Lining=, Cast-iron, etc., illus. 182
- Cog-Wheel, illus. 183
-
- =Section-Lining Drawings= desc. 182, illus. 183
- Wheel Hub, illus. 184
-
- =Selecting Drawing Instruments= 103, 240
-
- =Semi-Circle=, def. 43
-
- =Sensitized Paper=, desc. 188
-
- =Set-Square=, illus. 102, 114
-
- =Shading Curves=, illus. 181
-
- =Shading Drawings= 180
-
- =Shadow=, def. 49
-
- =Shadow Line=, def. 46
-
- =Shadow Lines=, “Points” 241
-
- =Sharpening Pencils= 57
-
- =Shop Drawings=, Office Rules 192
-
- =Sight=, Point of, in Perspective Drawing 252
- Sense of 254
-
- =Sight Lines= in Projection, illus. 157
-
- =Sine= of an Arc 99
-
- =Skew-Gearing=, desc. 203
-
- =Sketch Books=, desc. 142
- Office Practice 194
-
- =Sketches=, details 142
-
- =Sketch=, Free-hand, Advantage of 55
-
- =Sketching= desc. 141, note 17
- Points to be observed in 141-2
-
- =Sloping Surface= in Projection desc. 159, illus. 166
-
- =Solid=, def. 49, 83
-
- =Solid Pattern=, def. 47
-
- =Speed of Gears= 208
-
- =Sphere=, def. 49
-
- =Spiral Curve=, def. 44
-
- =Spring Bows= illus. 122, 123, desc. 124
-
- =Spur-Gear= desc. 201, illus. 211
-
- =Spur Mortise-Wheel=, illus. 202
-
- =Spur-Wheel=, desc. 199, 216
- How to Draw 209
- Illus. 198
- Projection desc. 162, illus. 163
- Teeth of cast-iron, desc. 202
-
- =Square=, def. 48
- To Convert into an Octagon 95
- To Describe about a Circle 94
- To Inscribe in a Circle 93
-
- =Standards=, for U. S. 278
- Office Rules for 193
-
- =Steady Rest=, Scale, illus. 228
-
- =Straight Line=, def. 46
- To Draw a Perpendicular to a 86
- Drawing Figures of 66-7-8
- How to Draw a 57, 59
- To Bisect a 86
-
- =Steel=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
- =Steel Gears=, Economy of 216
-
- =Surface=, def. 49, 82
-
- =Symbols=, representing Materials 193
-
-
- =Table= of Areas of Circles 273-277
- Bolts, Standard Sizes of 280
- Circular Measure 272
- Circumferences of Circles 273-277
- Contents 24
- Decimal Equivalents 269
- Diameters of Circles 273-277
- Land Measure 272
- Metric Equivalents 270
- Pipe, Standard Sizes of Welded 279
- Roman Figures 272
- Solid Measure 272
- Wire Gauges 278
- Useful for Draughtsmen 266-280
-
- =Tangent= of an Arc, def. 99
- To Draw a, to a Circle 91
-
- =Tee-Iron=, illus. 75
-
- =Tee-Square=, Adjustable, desc. and illus. 113
- Desc. 112
- How to Use, illus. 111, 147
- Illus. 102, 112
- Points about 242
-
- =Teeth in Bevel Gears=, desc. 204
-
- =Terms and Definitions=, Preliminary 41
-
- =Test-Pieces=, Use of, in Blue Prints 188
-
- =Tetrahedron=, def. 48
-
- =Theorem=, def. 83
-
- =Thumb-Tack= illus. 109, desc. 110
-
- =Tints and Colors=, desc. 184
-
- =Title and Date=, on Sketches 142
-
- =Title, Date, Scale, etc.=, Office Rules for 192
-
- =Title Page= vii
-
- =Tracing-Cloth=, desc. 186
-
- =Tracings=, Office Rules for Keeping 195
- Tinted and Shaded, desc. 184
-
- =Trammels=, desc. and illus. 125
-
- =Trapezium=, def. 48
-
- =Trapezoid=, def. 48
-
- =Trestles=, Drawing-Board, desc. and illus. 110
-
- =Triangle=, def. 50
- To Describe a Circle about a 93
-
- =Triangle, or Set-Square=, desc. and illus. 114
- How to Use desc. 147, illus. 166
-
- =Triangles=, illus. 102
- To Construct 92
-
- =Trigonometry=, principles and def. 98
-
- =Trisect=, def. 50
-
- =Trundle Wheel= desc. 201, illus. 208
-
- =Two-foot Rule=, illus. 128
-
-
- =U. S. Standards=, Pipes 279
-
- =Upright Lines=, How to Draw 61
-
- =Useful Tables for Draughtsmen= 269-280
-
-
- =Valve=, Blow-off desc. 174, illus. 175
-
- =Valve Gear=, or Link Motion, illus. 225
-
- =Vanishing Point=, def. and illus. 251
- In Drawing, illus. 250
- In Perspective Drawing 252
-
- =Varnish=, Shellac, for Drawings 241
-
- =Versed Sine= of an Arc 99
-
- =Vertex=, def. 51
- Of an Angle, def. 42
-
- =Vertical=, def. 51, 251
-
- =Vertical Lines=, in Perspective 257
-
- =Vertical-Plane=, def. 249
-
- =View=, def. 51
-
- =Visual Ray= in Perspective Drawing 256
-
- =Visual Rays of Light= desc. 252, illus. 255
-
- =Vulcanite=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
-
- =Water Reflection= in Perspective Drawing, illus. 246
-
- =Wheel=, Bevel, A, illus. 203
- Crown, illus. 208
- Helical, A, illus. 207
- Hub, Section-Lining, illus. 184
- Internal Gear, desc. 201, 207
- Miter, A, illus. 204
- Proportions of the Teeth of a 210
- Spur illus. 198, desc. 199, 201
- Worm, desc. 201
-
- =Wood=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
- =Working Drawing=, Bending Machine 220-1
- Def. 51
- Illus. 218, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 228
- Bumping Post, illus. 226
- Points, etc. 243
- Power Punching Press 222
- Numbering a, Office Rules for 195
- To Read a 229
-
- =Working Drawings=, desc. 219, 227
-
- =Worm-Gear=, desc. 206
-
- =Worm-Wheel= desc. 201, illus. 206
- Speed of a 216
-
- =Wrench=, illus. 75
-
- =Wrist-Lines=, illus. 64
-
- =Wrought-Iron=, Section-Lining, illus. 182
-
-
-
-
-Transcriber’s Notes
-
-
- Inconsistent and unusual spelling, capitalisation and hyphenation have
- been retained, unless mentioned below. The discrepancies between the
- General List of Contents and the structure of the text have not been
- corrected.
-
- Depending on the hard- and software used to read this text and their
- settings, not all elements may display as intended. Where scales are
- given for illustrations, these can, of course, not be relied upon for
- measurements.
-
- The numbering of illustrations in the book is inconsistent.
- Illustrations that have no numbered captions may or may not be
- counted; this has not been standardised, except as listed below.
- Missing illustration numbers have been added only where they are
- referenced in the text. The illustrations referred to in the text as
- Figs. 242 and 243 are captioned Fig. 243 and 244.
-
- Page 65-69 and Figs. 66-71: the text uses upper case reference
- letters, the illustrations lower case, which has not been
- standardised.
-
- Page 84, table of symbols: the source document uses letters (O and L)
- rather than symbols for circle and angle.
-
- Page 94, Bisect two of the angles _A C_ of the triangle: presumably
- the unmarked point A is in the lower left-hand corner of the
- illustration.
-
- Page 113, The tee-square, as shown, ...: there is no illustration with
- the relevant reference numbers; probably the reference is to Fig.
- 151/152.
-
- Page 239, rough irregular lines, as in fig. 134, on page 131: there is
- no Fig. 134 on page 131; page 134 nor page 131 show the rough
- irregular lines. Several other illustrations in the book do show such
- lines.
-
- Index: the order of entries is as printed in the source document.
-
-
- Changes made:
-
- Illustrations and Notes have been moved out of text paragraphs.
-
- Some obvious minor punctuation and typographical errors have been
- corrected silently.
-
- In some tables the ditto symbol („) has been replaced with the dittoed
- text; some tables have been split or re-arranged. The use of × and x
- in multiplications and dimensions has been standardised to ×.
-
- Page 48: Figure numbers 45-49 added to illustration.
-
- Page 89: and on _B_ on _B I_ changed to and on _B_ on _B D_.
-
- Page 177: D = diam. of collar changed to d = diam. of collar.
-
- Page 193: Bbt.--Babbit. changed to Bbt.--Babbitt.
-
- Page 203: as described on page 191 changed to as described on page
- 199.
-
- Page 214: 4 tenths measured at the 2′ line changed to 4 tenths
- measured at the 2″ line.
-
-*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SELF-HELP MECHANICAL
-DRAWING ***
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the
-United States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
-the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
-of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
-copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
-easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
-of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
-Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
-do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
-by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
-license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country other than the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where
- you are located before using this eBook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that:
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
-the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
-forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
-Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
-to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website
-and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without
-widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.